Mercurial > emacs
annotate man/reftex.texi @ 47108:256bfac4f5b5
*** empty log message ***
author | Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org> |
---|---|
date | Thu, 29 Aug 2002 14:50:07 +0000 |
parents | 904fd28be439 |
children | 0a70200bde27 |
rev | line source |
---|---|
25829 | 1 \input texinfo @c -*-texinfo-*- |
2 @c %**start of header | |
38003 | 3 @setfilename ../info/reftex |
25829 | 4 @settitle RefTeX User Manual |
30009 | 5 @dircategory Emacs |
25829 | 6 @direntry |
7 * RefTeX: (reftex). Emacs support for LaTeX cross-references and citations. | |
8 @end direntry | |
9 @synindex ky cp | |
10 @syncodeindex vr cp | |
11 @syncodeindex fn cp | |
47050
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
12 @set VERSION 4.19 |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
13 @set EDITION 4.19 |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
14 @set DATE August 2002 |
25829 | 15 @c %**end of header |
16 @finalout | |
17 | |
18 @c Macro definitions | |
19 | |
20 @c Subheadings inside a table. Need a difference between info and the rest. | |
21 @macro tablesubheading{text} | |
22 @ifinfo | |
23 @subsubheading \text\ | |
24 @end ifinfo | |
25 @ifnotinfo | |
26 @item @b{\text\} | |
27 @end ifnotinfo | |
28 @end macro | |
29 | |
30 @ifinfo | |
31 This file documents @b{Ref@TeX{}}, a package to do labels, references, | |
32 citations and indices for LaTeX documents with Emacs.@refill | |
33 | |
34 This is edition @value{EDITION} of the @b{Ref@TeX{}} User Manual for | |
35 @b{Ref@TeX{}} @value{VERSION}@refill | |
36 | |
46684
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
37 Copyright (c) 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc. |
25829 | 38 |
37404
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
39 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document |
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
40 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or |
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
41 any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no |
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
42 Invariant Sections, with the Front-Cover texts being ``A GNU |
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
43 Manual'', and with the Back-Cover Texts as in (a) below. A copy of the |
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
44 license is included in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation |
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
45 License'' in the Emacs manual. |
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
46 |
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
47 (a) The FSF's Back-Cover Text is: ``You have freedom to copy and modify |
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
48 this GNU Manual, like GNU software. Copies published by the Free |
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
49 Software Foundation raise funds for GNU development.'' |
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
50 |
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
51 This document is part of a collection distributed under the GNU Free |
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
52 Documentation License. If you want to distribute this document |
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
53 separately from the collection, you can do so by adding a copy of the |
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
54 license to the document, as described in section 6 of the license. |
25829 | 55 @end ifinfo |
56 | |
57 @titlepage | |
58 @title Ref@TeX{} User Manual | |
59 @subtitle Support for LaTeX labels, references, citations and index entries with GNU Emacs | |
60 @subtitle Edition @value{EDITION}, @value{DATE} | |
61 | |
62 @author by Carsten Dominik | |
63 @page | |
46684
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
64 Copyright @copyright{} 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc. |
25829 | 65 |
66 @sp 2 | |
67 This is edition @value{EDITION} of the @cite{Ref@TeX{} User Manual} for | |
68 @b{Ref@TeX{}} version @value{VERSION}, @value{DATE}.@refill | |
69 | |
70 @sp 2 | |
71 | |
37404
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
72 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document |
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
73 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or |
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
74 any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no |
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
75 Invariant Sections, with the Front-Cover texts being ``A GNU |
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
76 Manual'', and with the Back-Cover Texts as in (a) below. A copy of the |
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
77 license is included in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation |
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
78 License'' in the Emacs manual. |
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
79 |
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
80 (a) The FSF's Back-Cover Text is: ``You have freedom to copy and modify |
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
81 this GNU Manual, like GNU software. Copies published by the Free |
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
82 Software Foundation raise funds for GNU development.'' |
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
83 |
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
84 This document is part of a collection distributed under the GNU Free |
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
85 Documentation License. If you want to distribute this document |
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
86 separately from the collection, you can do so by adding a copy of the |
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
87 license to the document, as described in section 6 of the license. |
25829 | 88 @end titlepage |
89 @page | |
90 | |
29772
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
91 @ifnottex |
25829 | 92 @node Top,,,(dir) |
93 | |
94 @b{Ref@TeX{}} is a package for managing Labels, References, | |
95 Citations and index entries with GNU Emacs.@refill | |
96 | |
97 Don't be discouraged by the size of this manual, which covers | |
98 @b{Ref@TeX{}} in great depth. All you need to know to use | |
99 @b{Ref@TeX{}} can be summarized on two pages (@pxref{RefTeX in a | |
100 Nutshell}). You can go back later to other parts of this document when | |
101 needed.@refill | |
102 | |
103 @menu | |
104 * Introduction:: Quick-Start information. | |
105 | |
106 * Table of Contents:: A Tool to move around quickly. | |
107 * Labels and References:: Creating and referencing labels. | |
108 * Citations:: Creating Citations. | |
109 * Index Support:: Creating and Checking Index Entries. | |
110 * Viewing Cross-References:: Who references or cites what? | |
111 | |
112 * RefTeXs Menu:: The Ref menu in the menubar. | |
39267 | 113 * Key Bindings:: The default key bindings. |
25829 | 114 * Faces:: Fontification of RefTeX's buffers. |
115 * Multifile Documents:: Document spread over many files. | |
116 * Language Support:: How to support other languages. | |
117 * Finding Files:: Included TeX files and BibTeX .bib files. | |
118 * AUCTeX:: Cooperation with AUCTeX. | |
119 * Optimizations:: When RefTeX is too slow. | |
120 * Problems and Work-Arounds:: First Aid. | |
121 * Imprint:: Author, Web-site, Thanks | |
122 | |
123 * Commands:: Which are the available commands. | |
124 * Options:: How to extend and configure RefTeX. | |
125 * Keymaps and Hooks:: For customization. | |
126 * Changes:: A List of recent changes to RefTeX. | |
127 | |
128 The Index | |
129 | |
130 * Index:: The full index. | |
131 | |
132 @detailmenu | |
133 | |
134 Introduction | |
135 | |
136 * Installation:: How to install and activate RefTeX. | |
137 * RefTeX in a Nutshell:: A brief summary and quick guide. | |
138 | |
139 Labels and References | |
140 | |
141 * Creating Labels:: | |
142 * Referencing Labels:: | |
143 * Builtin Label Environments:: The environments RefTeX knows about. | |
144 * Defining Label Environments:: ... and environments it doesn't. | |
145 * Reference Info:: View the label corresponding to a \ref. | |
146 * xr (LaTeX package):: References to external documents. | |
147 * varioref (LaTeX package):: How to create \vref instead of \ref. | |
148 * fancyref (LaTeX package):: How to create \fref instead of \ref. | |
149 | |
150 Defining Label Environments | |
151 | |
152 * Theorem and Axiom:: Defined with @code{\newenvironment}. | |
153 * Quick Equation:: When a macro sets the label type. | |
154 * Figure Wrapper:: When a macro argument is a label. | |
155 * Adding Magic Words:: Other words for other languages. | |
156 * Using \eqref:: How to switch to this AMS-LaTeX macro. | |
157 * Non-Standard Environments:: Environments without \begin and \end | |
158 * Putting it Together:: How to combine many entries. | |
159 | |
160 Citations | |
161 | |
162 * Creating Citations:: How to create them. | |
163 * Citation Styles:: Natbib, Harvard, Chicago and Co. | |
164 * Citation Info:: View the corresponding database entry. | |
165 * Chapterbib and Bibunits:: Multiple bibliographies in a Document. | |
166 * Citations Outside LaTeX:: How to make citations in Emails etc. | |
167 | |
168 Index Support | |
169 | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
170 * Creating Index Entries:: Macros and completion of entries. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
171 * The Index Phrases File:: A special file for global indexing. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
172 * Displaying and Editing the Index:: The index editor. |
25829 | 173 * Builtin Index Macros:: The index macros RefTeX knows about. |
174 * Defining Index Macros:: ... and macros it doesn't. | |
175 | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
176 The Index Phrases File |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
177 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
178 * Collecting Phrases:: Collecting from document or external. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
179 * Consistency Checks:: Check for duplicates etc. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
180 * Global Indexing:: The interactive indexing process. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
181 |
25829 | 182 AUCTeX |
183 | |
184 * AUCTeX-RefTeX Interface:: How both packages work together | |
185 * Style Files:: AUCTeX's style files can support RefTeX | |
186 * Bib-Cite:: Hypertext reading of a document | |
187 | |
188 Options, Keymaps, Hooks | |
189 | |
190 * Options (Table of Contents):: | |
191 * Options (Defining Label Environments):: | |
192 * Options (Creating Labels):: | |
193 * Options (Referencing Labels):: | |
194 * Options (Creating Citations):: | |
195 * Options (Index Support):: | |
196 * Options (Viewing Cross-References):: | |
197 * Options (Finding Files):: | |
198 * Options (Optimizations):: | |
199 * Options (Fontification):: | |
200 * Options (Misc):: | |
201 | |
202 @end detailmenu | |
203 @end menu | |
204 | |
29772
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
205 @end ifnottex |
25829 | 206 |
207 @node Introduction, Table of Contents, , Top | |
208 @chapter Introduction | |
209 @cindex Introduction | |
210 | |
211 @b{Ref@TeX{}} is a specialized package for support of labels, | |
212 references, citations, and the index in LaTeX. @b{Ref@TeX{}} wraps | |
213 itself round 4 LaTeX macros: @code{\label}, @code{\ref}, @code{\cite}, | |
214 and @code{\index}. Using these macros usually requires looking up | |
215 different parts of the document and searching through BibTeX database | |
216 files. @b{Ref@TeX{}} automates these time--consuming tasks almost | |
217 entirely. It also provides functions to display the structure of a | |
218 document and to move around in this structure quickly.@refill | |
219 | |
220 @iftex | |
221 Don't be discouraged by the size of this manual, which covers @b{Ref@TeX{}} | |
222 in great depth. All you need to know to use @b{Ref@TeX{}} can be | |
223 summarized on two pages (@pxref{RefTeX in a Nutshell}). You can go | |
224 back later to other parts of this document when needed. | |
225 @end iftex | |
226 | |
227 @xref{Imprint}, for information about who to contact for help, bug | |
228 reports or suggestions. | |
229 | |
230 @menu | |
231 * Installation:: How to install and activate RefTeX. | |
232 * RefTeX in a Nutshell:: A brief summary and quick guide. | |
233 @end menu | |
234 | |
235 @node Installation, RefTeX in a Nutshell, , Introduction | |
236 @section Installation | |
237 @cindex Installation | |
238 | |
239 @b{Ref@TeX{}} is bundled and pre--installed with Emacs since version 20.2. | |
240 It was also bundled and pre--installed with XEmacs 19.16--20.x. XEmacs | |
241 21.x users want to install the corresponding plug-in package which is | |
242 available from the | |
243 @uref{ftp://ftp.xemacs.org/pub/xemacs/packages/,XEmacs ftp site}. See | |
244 the XEmacs 21.x documentation on package installation for | |
245 details.@refill | |
246 | |
247 Users of earlier Emacs distributions (including Emacs 19) can get a copy | |
248 of the @b{Ref@TeX{}} distribution from the maintainers web-page. | |
249 @xref{Imprint}, for more information.@refill | |
250 | |
251 @section Environment | |
252 @cindex Finding files | |
253 @cindex BibTeX database files, not found | |
254 @cindex TeX files, not found | |
255 @cindex @code{TEXINPUTS}, environment variable | |
256 @cindex @code{BIBINPUTS}, environment variable | |
257 | |
258 @b{Ref@TeX{}} needs to access all files which are part of a multifile | |
259 document, and the BibTeX database files requested by the | |
260 @code{\bibliography} command. To find these files, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will | |
261 require a search path, i.e. a list of directories to check. Normally | |
262 this list is stored in the environment variables @code{TEXINPUTS} and | |
263 @code{BIBINPUTS} which are also used by @b{Ref@TeX{}}. However, on some | |
264 systems these variables do not contain the full search path. If | |
265 @b{Ref@TeX{}} does not work for you because it cannot find some files, | |
266 read @ref{Finding Files}. | |
267 | |
268 @section Entering @b{Ref@TeX{}} Mode | |
269 | |
270 @findex turn-on-reftex | |
271 @findex reftex-mode | |
272 @vindex LaTeX-mode-hook | |
273 @vindex latex-mode-hook | |
274 To turn @b{Ref@TeX{}} Mode on and off in a particular buffer, use | |
275 @kbd{M-x reftex-mode}. To turn on @b{Ref@TeX{}} Mode for all LaTeX | |
276 files, add the following lines to your @file{.emacs} file:@refill | |
277 | |
278 @example | |
279 (add-hook 'LaTeX-mode-hook 'turn-on-reftex) ; with AUCTeX LaTeX mode | |
280 (add-hook 'latex-mode-hook 'turn-on-reftex) ; with Emacs latex mode | |
281 @end example | |
282 | |
283 @page | |
284 @node RefTeX in a Nutshell, , Installation, Introduction | |
285 @section @b{Ref@TeX{}} in a Nutshell | |
286 @cindex Quick-Start | |
287 @cindex Getting Started | |
288 @cindex RefTeX in a Nutshell | |
289 @cindex Nutshell, RefTeX in a | |
290 | |
291 @enumerate | |
292 @item | |
293 @b{Table of Contents}@* Typing @kbd{C-c =} (@code{reftex-toc}) will show | |
294 a table of contents of the document. This buffer can display sections, | |
295 labels and index entries defined in the document. From the buffer, you | |
296 can jump quickly to every part of your document. Press @kbd{?} to get | |
297 help.@refill | |
298 | |
299 @item | |
300 @b{Labels and References}@* @b{Ref@TeX{}} helps to create unique labels | |
301 and to find the correct key for references quickly. It distinguishes | |
302 labels for different environments, knows about all standard | |
303 environments (and many others), and can be configured to recognize any | |
304 additional labeled environments you have defined yourself (variable | |
305 @code{reftex-label-alist}).@refill | |
306 | |
307 @itemize @bullet | |
308 @item | |
309 @b{Creating Labels}@* | |
310 Type @kbd{C-c (} (@code{reftex-label}) to insert a label at point. | |
311 @b{Ref@TeX{}} will either | |
312 @itemize @minus | |
313 @item | |
314 derive a label from context (default for section labels) | |
315 @item | |
316 prompt for a label string (default for figures and tables) or | |
317 @item | |
318 insert a simple label made of a prefix and a number (all other | |
319 environments)@refill | |
320 @end itemize | |
321 @noindent | |
322 Which labels are created how is configurable with the variable | |
323 @code{reftex-insert-label-flags}.@refill | |
324 | |
325 @item | |
326 @b{Referencing Labels}@* To make a reference, type @kbd{C-c )} | |
327 (@code{reftex-reference}). This shows an outline of the document with | |
328 all labels of a certain type (figure, equation,...) and some label | |
329 context. Selecting a label inserts a @code{\ref@{@var{label}@}} macro | |
330 into the original buffer.@refill | |
331 @end itemize | |
332 | |
333 @item | |
334 @b{Citations}@* | |
335 Typing @kbd{C-c [} (@code{reftex-citation}) will let you specify a | |
336 regular expression to search in current BibTeX database files (as | |
337 specified in the @code{\bibliography} command) and pull out a list of | |
338 matches for you to choose from. The list is @emph{formatted} and | |
339 sorted. The selected article is referenced as @samp{\cite@{@var{key}@}} | |
340 (see the variable @code{reftex-cite-format} if you want to insert | |
341 different macros).@refill | |
342 | |
343 @item | |
344 @b{Index Support}@* | |
345 @b{Ref@TeX{}} helps to enter index entries. It also compiles all | |
346 entries into an alphabetically sorted @file{*Index*} buffer which you | |
347 can use to check and edit the entries. @b{Ref@TeX{}} knows about the | |
348 standard index macros and can be configured to recognize any additional | |
349 macros you have defined (@code{reftex-index-macros}). Multiple indices | |
350 are supported.@refill | |
351 | |
352 @itemize @bullet | |
353 @item | |
354 @b{Creating Index Entries}@* | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
355 To index the current selection or the word at point, type @kbd{C-c /} |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
356 (@code{reftex-index-selection-or-word}). The default macro |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
357 @code{reftex-index-default-macro} will be used. For a more complex entry |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
358 type @kbd{C-c <} (@code{reftex-index}), select any of the index macros |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
359 and enter the arguments with completion.@refill |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
360 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
361 @item |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
362 @b{The Index Phrases File (Delayed Indexing)}@* |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
363 Type @kbd{C-c \} (@code{reftex-index-phrase-selection-or-word}) to add |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
364 the current word or selection to a special @emph{index phrase file}. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
365 @b{Ref@TeX{}} can later search the document for occurrences of these |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
366 phrases and let you interactively index the matches.@refill |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
367 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
368 @item |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
369 @b{Displaying and Editing the Index}@* |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
370 To display the compiled index in a special buffer, type @kbd{C-c >} |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
371 (@code{reftex-display-index}). From that buffer you can check and edit |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
372 all entries.@refill |
25829 | 373 @end itemize |
374 | |
375 @page | |
376 @item @b{Viewing Cross-References}@* | |
377 When point is on the @var{key} argument of a cross--referencing macro | |
378 (@code{\label}, @code{\ref}, @code{\cite}, @code{\bibitem}, | |
379 @code{\index}, and variations) or inside a BibTeX database entry, you | |
380 can press @kbd{C-c &} (@code{reftex-view-crossref}) to display | |
381 corresponding locations in the document and associated BibTeX database | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
382 files.@refill @* |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
383 When the enclosing macro is @code{\cite} or @code{\ref} and no other |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
384 message occupies the echo area, information about the citation or label |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
385 will automatically be displayed in the echo area.@refill |
25829 | 386 |
387 @item | |
388 @b{Multifile Documents}@* | |
389 Multifile Documents are fully supported. The included files must have a | |
390 file variable @code{TeX-master} or @code{tex-main-file} pointing to the | |
391 master file. @b{Ref@TeX{}} provides cross-referencing information from | |
392 all parts of the document, and across document borders | |
393 (@file{xr.sty}).@refill | |
394 | |
395 @item | |
396 @b{Document Parsing}@* @b{Ref@TeX{}} needs to parse the document in | |
397 order to find labels and other information. It does it automatically | |
398 once and updates its list internally when @code{reftex-label} and | |
399 @code{reftex-index} are used. To enforce reparsing, call any of the | |
400 commands described above with a raw @kbd{C-u} prefix, or press the | |
401 @kbd{r} key in the label selection buffer, the table of contents | |
402 buffer, or the index buffer.@refill | |
403 | |
404 @item | |
405 @b{AUCTeX} @* If your major LaTeX mode is AUCTeX, @b{Ref@TeX{}} can | |
406 cooperate with it (see variable @code{reftex-plug-into-AUCTeX}). AUCTeX | |
407 contains style files which trigger appropriate settings in | |
408 @b{Ref@TeX{}}, so that for many of the popular LaTeX packages no | |
409 additional customizations will be necessary.@refill | |
410 | |
411 @item | |
47050
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
412 @b{Useful Settings}@* |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
413 To integrate RefTeX with AUCTeX, use |
25829 | 414 @lisp |
415 (setq reftex-plug-into-AUCTeX t) | |
416 @end lisp | |
417 | |
418 To make your own LaTeX macro definitions known to @b{Ref@TeX{}}, | |
419 customize the variables@refill | |
420 @example | |
421 @code{reftex-label-alist} @r{(for label macros/environments)} | |
422 @code{reftex-section-levels} @r{(for sectioning commands)} | |
423 @code{reftex-cite-format} @r{(for @code{\cite}-like macros)} | |
424 @code{reftex-index-macros} @r{(for @code{\index}-like macros)} | |
425 @code{reftex-index-default-macro} @r{(to set the default macro)} | |
426 @end example | |
427 If you have a large number of macros defined, you may want to write | |
428 an AUCTeX style file to support them with both AUCTeX and | |
429 @b{Ref@TeX{}}.@refill | |
430 | |
431 @item @b{Where Next?}@* Go ahead and use @b{Ref@TeX{}}. Use its menus | |
432 until you have picked up the key bindings. For an overview of what you | |
433 can do in each of the different special buffers, press @kbd{?}. Read | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
434 the manual if you get stuck, of if you are curious what else might be |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
435 available. The first part of the manual explains in |
25829 | 436 a tutorial way how to use and customize @b{Ref@TeX{}}. The second |
437 part is a command and variable reference.@refill | |
438 @end enumerate | |
439 | |
440 @node Table of Contents, Labels and References, Introduction, Top | |
441 @chapter Table of Contents | |
442 @cindex @file{*toc*} buffer | |
443 @cindex Table of contents buffer | |
444 @findex reftex-toc | |
445 @kindex C-c = | |
446 | |
447 Pressing the keys @kbd{C-c =} pops up a buffer showing the table of | |
448 contents of the document. By default, this @file{*toc*} buffer shows | |
449 only the sections of a document. Using the @kbd{l} and @kbd{i} keys you | |
450 can display all labels and index entries defined in the document as | |
451 well.@refill | |
452 | |
453 With the cursor in any of the lines denoting a location in the | |
454 document, simple key strokes will display the corresponding part in | |
455 another window, jump to that location, or perform other actions.@refill | |
456 | |
457 @kindex ? | |
458 Here is a list of special commands in the @file{*toc*} buffer. A | |
459 summary of this information is always available by pressing | |
460 @kbd{?}.@refill | |
461 | |
462 @table @kbd | |
463 | |
464 @tablesubheading{General} | |
465 @item ? | |
466 Display a summary of commands. | |
467 | |
468 @item 0-9, - | |
469 Prefix argument. | |
470 | |
471 @tablesubheading{Moving around} | |
472 @item n | |
473 Goto next entry in the table of context. | |
474 | |
475 @item p | |
476 Goto previous entry in the table of context. | |
477 | |
478 @item C-c C-n | |
479 Goto next section heading. Useful when many labels and index entries | |
480 separate section headings.@refill | |
481 | |
482 @item C-c C-p | |
483 Goto previous section heading. | |
484 | |
37999
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
485 @item N z |
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
486 Jump to section N, using the prefix arg. For example, @kbd{3 z} jumps |
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
487 to section 3.@refill |
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
488 |
25829 | 489 @tablesubheading{Access to document locations} |
490 @item @key{SPC} | |
491 Show the corresponding location in another window. This command does | |
492 @emph{not} select that other window.@refill | |
493 | |
494 @item @key{TAB} | |
495 Goto the location in another window. | |
496 | |
497 @item @key{RET} | |
498 Go to the location and hide the @file{*toc*} buffer. This will restore | |
499 the window configuration before @code{reftex-toc} (@kbd{C-c =}) was | |
500 called.@refill | |
501 | |
37999
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
502 @item mouse-2 |
25829 | 503 @vindex reftex-highlight-selection |
504 Clicking with mouse button 2 on a line has the same effect as @key{RET}. | |
505 See also variable @code{reftex-highlight-selection}, @ref{Options | |
506 (Fontification)}.@refill | |
507 | |
508 @item f | |
509 @vindex reftex-toc-follow-mode | |
510 @vindex reftex-revisit-to-follow | |
511 Toggle follow mode. When follow mode is active, the other window will | |
512 always show the location corresponding to the line at point in the | |
513 @file{*toc*} buffer. This is similar to pressing @key{SPC} after each | |
514 cursor motion. The default for this flag can be set with the variable | |
515 @code{reftex-toc-follow-mode}. Note that only context in files already | |
516 visited is shown. @b{Ref@TeX{}} will not visit a file just for follow | |
517 mode. See, however, the variable | |
518 @code{reftex-revisit-to-follow}.@refill | |
519 | |
520 @item . | |
521 Show calling point in another window. This is the point from where | |
522 @code{reftex-toc} was last called. | |
523 | |
47050
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
524 @page |
25829 | 525 @tablesubheading{Exiting} |
526 @item q | |
527 Hide the @file{*toc*} buffer, return to the position where | |
528 @code{reftex-toc} was last called.@refill | |
529 | |
530 @item k | |
531 Kill the @file{*toc*} buffer, return to the position where | |
532 @code{reftex-toc} was last called.@refill | |
533 | |
534 @item C-c > | |
535 Switch to the @file{*Index*} buffer of this document. With prefix | |
536 @samp{2}, restrict the index to the section at point in the @file{*toc*} | |
537 buffer. | |
538 | |
539 @tablesubheading{Controlling what gets displayed} | |
540 | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
541 @item t |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
542 @vindex reftex-toc-max-level |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
543 Change the maximum level of toc entries displayed in the @file{*toc*} |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
544 buffer. Without prefix arg, all levels will be included. With prefix |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
545 arg (e.g @kbd{3 t}), ignore all toc entries with level greater than |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
546 @var{arg} (3 in this case). Chapters are level 1, sections are level 2. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
547 The mode line @samp{T<>} indicator shows the current value. The default |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
548 depth can be configured with the variable |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
549 @code{reftex-toc-max-level}.@refill |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
550 |
25829 | 551 @item F |
552 @vindex reftex-toc-include-file-boundaries | |
553 Toggle the display of the file borders of a multifile document in the | |
554 @file{*toc*} buffer. The default for this flag can be set with the | |
555 variable @code{reftex-toc-include-file-boundaries}.@refill | |
556 | |
557 @item l | |
558 @vindex reftex-toc-include-labels | |
559 Toggle the display of labels in the @file{*toc*} buffer. The default | |
560 for this flag can be set with the variable | |
561 @code{reftex-toc-include-labels}. When called with a prefix argument, | |
562 @b{Ref@TeX{}} will prompt for a label type and include only labels of | |
563 the selected type in the @file{*toc*} buffer. The mode line @samp{L<>} | |
564 indicator shows which labels are included.@refill | |
565 | |
566 @item i | |
567 @vindex reftex-toc-include-index-entries | |
568 Toggle the display of index entries in the @file{*toc*} buffer. The | |
569 default for this flag can be set with the variable | |
570 @code{reftex-toc-include-index-entries}. When called with a prefix | |
571 argument, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will prompt for a specific index and include | |
572 only entries in the selected index in the @file{*toc*} buffer. The mode | |
573 line @samp{I<>} indicator shows which index is used.@refill | |
574 | |
575 @item c | |
576 @vindex reftex-toc-include-context | |
577 Toggle the display of label and index context in the @file{*toc*} | |
578 buffer. The default for this flag can be set with the variable | |
579 @code{reftex-toc-include-context}.@refill | |
580 | |
581 @tablesubheading{Updating the buffer} | |
582 | |
583 @item g | |
584 Rebuild the @file{*toc*} buffer. This does @emph{not} rescan the | |
585 document.@refill | |
586 | |
587 @item r | |
588 @vindex reftex-enable-partial-scans | |
589 Reparse the LaTeX document and rebuild the @file{*toc*} buffer. When | |
590 @code{reftex-enable-partial-scans} is non-nil, rescan only the file this | |
591 location is defined in, not the entire document.@refill | |
592 | |
593 @item C-u r | |
594 Reparse the @emph{entire} LaTeX document and rebuild the @file{*toc*} | |
595 buffer.@refill | |
596 | |
597 @item x | |
598 Switch to the @file{*toc*} buffer of an external document. When the | |
599 current document is using the @code{xr} package (@pxref{xr (LaTeX | |
600 package)}), @b{Ref@TeX{}} will switch to one of the external | |
601 documents.@refill | |
602 | |
47050
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
603 @item a |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
604 Toggle the automatic recentering of the @file{*toc*} buffer. When this |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
605 option is on, moving around in the document will cause the @file{*toc*} |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
606 to always highlight the current section. This can be enabled by default |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
607 with the variable @code{reftex-auto-recenter-toc}. |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
608 |
25829 | 609 @end table |
610 | |
611 @vindex reftex-toc-map | |
612 In order to define additional commands for the @file{*toc*} buffer, the | |
613 keymap @code{reftex-toc-map} may be used.@refill | |
614 | |
47050
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
615 @findex reftex-toc-recenter |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
616 @vindex reftex-auto-recenter-toc |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
617 @vindex reftex-idle-time |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
618 @cindex @file{*toc*} buffer, recentering |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
619 @cindex Table of contents buffer, recentering |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
620 @kindex C-c - |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
621 If you call @code{reftex-toc} while the @file{*toc*} buffer already |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
622 exists, the cursor will immediately jump to the right place, i.e. the |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
623 section from which @code{reftex-toc} was called will be highlighted. |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
624 The command @kbd{C-c -} (@code{reftex-toc-recenter}) will only redisplay |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
625 the @file{*toc*} buffer and highlight the correct line without actually |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
626 selecting the @file{*toc*} window. This can be useful to quickly find |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
627 out where in the document you currently are. If you want the TOC buffer |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
628 to show the current section automatically whenever you stop typing, try |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
629 @lisp |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
630 (setq reftex-auto-recenter-toc t) |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
631 @end lisp |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
632 When this is turned on, the toc buffer will be recentered whenever Emacs |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
633 is idle for more than @code{reftex-idle-time} seconds. |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
634 |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
635 |
25829 | 636 @cindex Sectioning commands |
637 @cindex KOMA-Script, LaTeX classes | |
638 @cindex LaTeX classes, KOMA-Script | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
639 @cindex TOC entries for environments |
25829 | 640 @vindex reftex-section-levels |
641 The section macros recognized by @b{Ref@TeX{}} are all LaTeX section | |
642 macros (from @code{\part} to @code{\subsubparagraph}) and the commands | |
643 @code{\addchap} and @code{\addsec} from the KOMA-Script classes. | |
644 Additional macros can be configured with the variable | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
645 @code{reftex-section-levels}. It is also possible to add certain LaTeX |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
646 environments to the table of contents. This is probably only useful for |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
647 theorem-like environments. @xref{Defining Label Environments}, for an |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
648 example. |
25829 | 649 |
650 @node Labels and References, Citations, Table of Contents, Top | |
651 @chapter Labels and References | |
652 @cindex Labels in LaTeX | |
653 @cindex References in LaTeX | |
654 @cindex Label category | |
655 @cindex Label environment | |
656 @cindex @code{\label} | |
657 | |
658 LaTeX provides a powerful mechanism to deal with cross--references in a | |
659 document. When writing a document, any part of it can be marked with a | |
660 label, like @samp{\label@{mark@}}. LaTeX records the current value of a | |
661 certain counter when a label is defined. Later references to this label | |
662 (like @samp{\ref@{mark@}}) will produce the recorded value of the | |
663 counter.@refill | |
664 | |
665 Labels can be used to mark sections, figures, tables, equations, | |
666 footnotes, items in enumerate lists etc. LaTeX is context sensitive in | |
667 doing this: A label defined in a figure environment automatically | |
668 records the figure counter, not the section counter.@refill | |
669 | |
670 Several different environments can share a common counter and therefore | |
671 a common label category. E.g. labels in both @code{equation} and | |
672 @code{eqnarray} environments record the value of the same counter - the | |
673 equation counter.@refill | |
674 | |
675 @menu | |
676 * Creating Labels:: | |
677 * Referencing Labels:: | |
678 * Builtin Label Environments:: The environments RefTeX knows about. | |
679 * Defining Label Environments:: ... and environments it doesn't. | |
680 * Reference Info:: View the label corresponding to a \ref. | |
681 * xr (LaTeX package):: References to external documents. | |
682 * varioref (LaTeX package):: How to create \vref instead of \ref. | |
683 * fancyref (LaTeX package):: How to create \fref instead of \ref. | |
684 @end menu | |
685 | |
686 @node Creating Labels, Referencing Labels, , Labels and References | |
687 @section Creating Labels | |
688 @cindex Creating labels | |
689 @cindex Labels, creating | |
690 @cindex Labels, deriving from context | |
691 @kindex C-c ( | |
692 @findex reftex-label | |
693 | |
694 In order to create a label in a LaTeX document, press @kbd{C-c (} | |
695 (@code{reftex-label}). Just like LaTeX, @b{Ref@TeX{}} is context sensitive | |
696 and will figure out the environment it currently is in and adapt the | |
697 label to that environment. A label usually consists of a short prefix | |
698 indicating the type of the label and a unique mark. @b{Ref@TeX{}} has | |
699 3 different modes to create this mark.@refill | |
700 | |
701 @enumerate | |
702 @item | |
703 @vindex reftex-translate-to-ascii-function | |
704 @vindex reftex-derive-label-parameters | |
705 @vindex reftex-label-illegal-re | |
706 @vindex reftex-abbrev-parameters | |
707 A label can be derived from context. This means, @b{Ref@TeX{}} takes | |
708 the context of the label definition and constructs a label from | |
709 that@footnote{Note that the context may contain constructs which are | |
710 illegal in labels. @b{Ref@TeX{}} will therefore strip the accent from | |
711 accented Latin-1 characters and remove everything else which is not | |
712 legal in labels. This mechanism is safe, but may not be satisfactory | |
713 for non-western languages. Check the following variables if you need to | |
714 change things: @code{reftex-translate-to-ascii-function}, | |
715 @code{reftex-derive-label-parameters}, @code{reftex-label-illegal-re}, | |
716 @code{reftex-abbrev-parameters}.}. This works best for section labels, | |
717 where the section heading is used to construct a label. In fact, | |
718 @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s default settings use this method only for section | |
719 labels. You will be asked to confirm the derived label, or edit | |
720 it.@refill | |
721 | |
722 @item | |
723 We may also use a simple unique number to identify a label. This is | |
724 mostly useful for labels where it is difficult to come up with a very | |
725 good descriptive name. @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s default settings use this method | |
726 for equations, enumerate items and footnotes. The author of @b{Ref@TeX{}} | |
727 tends to write documents with many equations and finds it impossible | |
728 to come up with good names for each of them. These simple labels are | |
729 inserted without query, and are therefore very fast. Good descriptive | |
730 names are not really necessary as @b{Ref@TeX{}} will provide context to | |
731 reference a label (@pxref{Referencing Labels}).@refill | |
732 | |
733 @item | |
734 The third method is to ask the user for a label. This is most | |
735 useful for things which are easy to describe briefly and do not turn up | |
736 too frequently in a document. @b{Ref@TeX{}} uses this for figures and | |
737 tables. Of course, one can enter the label directly by typing the full | |
738 @samp{\label@{mark@}}. The advantage of using @code{reftex-label} | |
739 anyway is that @b{Ref@TeX{}} will know that a new label has been defined. | |
740 It will then not be necessary to rescan the document in order to access | |
741 this label later.@refill | |
742 @end enumerate | |
743 | |
744 @vindex reftex-insert-label-flags | |
745 If you want to change the way certain labels are created, check out the | |
746 variable @code{reftex-insert-label-flags} (@pxref{Options (Creating | |
747 Labels)}).@refill | |
748 | |
749 If you are using AUCTeX to write your LaTeX documents, you can | |
750 set it up to delegate the creation of labels to | |
751 @b{Ref@TeX{}}. @xref{AUCTeX}, for more information. | |
752 | |
753 @node Referencing Labels, Builtin Label Environments, Creating Labels, Labels and References | |
754 @section Referencing Labels | |
755 @cindex Referencing labels | |
756 @cindex Labels, referencing | |
757 @cindex Selection buffer, labels | |
758 @cindex Selection process | |
759 @cindex @code{\ref} | |
760 @kindex C-c ) | |
761 @findex reftex-reference | |
762 | |
763 Referencing Labels is really at the heart of @b{Ref@TeX{}}. Press @kbd{C-c | |
764 )} in order to reference a label (reftex-reference). This will start a | |
765 selection process and finally insert the complete @samp{\ref@{label@}} | |
766 into the buffer.@refill | |
767 | |
768 First, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will determine the label category which is required. | |
769 Often that can be figured out from context. For example, if you | |
770 write @samp{As shown in eq.} and the press @kbd{C-c )}, @b{Ref@TeX{}} knows | |
771 that an equation label is going to be referenced. If it cannot figure | |
772 out what label category is needed, it will query for one.@refill | |
773 | |
774 You will then be presented with a label selection menu. This is a | |
775 special buffer which contains an outline of the document along with all | |
776 labels of the given label category. In addition, next to the label | |
777 there will be one line of context of the label definition, which is some | |
778 text in the buffer near the label definition. Usually this is | |
779 sufficient to identify the label. If you are unsure about a certain | |
780 label, pressing @key{SPC} will show the label definition point in | |
781 another window.@refill | |
782 | |
783 In order to reference a label, move to cursor to the correct label and | |
784 press @key{RET}. You can also reference several labels with a single | |
785 call to @code{reftex-reference} by marking entries with the @kbd{m} | |
786 key (see below). | |
787 | |
788 @kindex ? | |
789 Here is a list of special commands in the selection buffer. A summary | |
790 of this information is always available from the selection process by | |
791 pressing @kbd{?}.@refill | |
792 | |
793 | |
794 | |
795 @table @kbd | |
796 @tablesubheading{General} | |
797 @item ? | |
798 Show a summary of available commands. | |
799 | |
800 @item 0-9,- | |
801 Prefix argument. | |
802 | |
803 @tablesubheading{Moving around} | |
804 @item n | |
805 Go to next label. | |
806 | |
807 @item p | |
808 Go to previous label. | |
809 | |
810 @item b | |
811 Jump back to the position where you last left the selection buffer. | |
812 Normally this should get you back to the last referenced label.@refill | |
813 | |
814 @item C-c C-n | |
815 Goto next section heading. | |
816 | |
817 @item C-c C-p | |
818 Goto previous section heading. | |
819 | |
37999
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
820 @item N z |
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
821 Jump to section N, using the prefix arg. For example @kbd{3 z} jumps to |
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
822 section 3.@refill |
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
823 |
25829 | 824 @tablesubheading{Displaying Context} |
825 @item @key{SPC} | |
826 Show the surroundings of the definition of the current label in another | |
827 window. See also the @kbd{f} key.@refill | |
828 | |
829 @item f | |
830 @vindex reftex-revisit-to-follow | |
831 Toggle follow mode. When follow mode is active, the other window will | |
832 always display the full context of the current label. This is similar | |
833 to pressing @key{SPC} after each cursor motion. Note that only context | |
834 in files already visited is shown. @b{RefTeX} will not visit a file | |
835 just for follow mode. See, however, the variable | |
836 @code{reftex-revisit-to-follow}.@refill | |
837 | |
838 @item . | |
839 Show insertion point in another window. This is the point from where you | |
840 called @code{reftex-reference}.@refill | |
841 | |
842 @tablesubheading{Selecting a label and creating the reference} | |
843 @item @key{RET} | |
844 Insert a reference to the label at point into the buffer from which the | |
845 selection process was started. When entries have been marked, @key{RET} | |
846 references all marked labels.@refill | |
847 | |
37999
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
848 @item mouse-2 |
25829 | 849 @vindex reftex-highlight-selection |
850 Clicking with mouse button 2 on a label will accept it like @key{RET} | |
851 would. See also variable @code{reftex-highlight-selection}, @ref{Options | |
852 (Misc)}.@refill | |
853 | |
854 @vindex reftex-multiref-punctuation | |
855 @item m - + , | |
856 Mark the current entry. When several entries have been marked, pressing | |
857 @kbd{RET} will accept all of them and place them into several | |
858 @code{\ref} macros. The special markers @samp{,-+} also store a | |
859 separator to be inserted before the corresponding reference. So marking | |
860 six entries with the keys @samp{m , , - , +} will give a reference list | |
861 like this (see the variable @code{reftex-multiref-punctuation}) | |
862 @example | |
863 In eqs. (1), (2), (3)--(4), (5) and (6) | |
864 @end example | |
865 | |
866 @item u | |
867 Unmark a marked entry. | |
868 | |
869 @c FIXME: Do we need `A' as well for consistency? | |
870 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{saferef} | |
871 @cindex @code{saferef}, LaTeX package | |
872 @item a | |
873 Accept the marked entries and put all labels as a comma-separated list | |
874 into one @emph{single} @code{\ref} macro. Some packages like | |
875 @file{saferef.sty} support multiple references in this way.@refill | |
876 | |
877 @item l | |
878 Use the last referenced label(s) again. This is equivalent to moving to | |
879 that label and pressing @key{RET}.@refill | |
880 | |
881 @item @key{TAB} | |
882 Enter a label with completion. This may also be a label which does not | |
883 yet exist in the document. | |
884 | |
885 @item v | |
886 @cindex @code{varioref}, LaTeX package | |
887 @cindex @code{\vref} | |
888 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{varioref} | |
889 Toggle between @code{\ref} and @code{\vref} macro for references. The | |
890 @code{\vref} macro is defined in the @code{varioref} LaTeX package. | |
891 With this key you can force @b{Ref@TeX{}} to insert a @code{\vref} | |
892 macro. The current state of this flag is displayed by the @samp{S<>} | |
893 indicator in the mode line of the selection buffer.@refill | |
894 | |
895 @item V | |
896 @cindex @code{fancyref}, LaTeX package | |
897 @cindex @code{\fref} | |
898 @cindex @code{\Fref} | |
899 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{fancyref} | |
900 Cycle between @code{\ref}, @code{\fref} and @code{\Fref}. The | |
901 @code{\fref} and @code{\Fref} macros are defined in the @code{fancyref} | |
902 LaTeX package. With this key you can force @b{Ref@TeX{}} to insert a | |
903 @code{\fref} or @code{\Fref} macro. The current state of this flag is | |
904 displayed by the @samp{S<>} indicator in the mode line of the | |
905 selection buffer. | |
906 | |
907 @tablesubheading{Exiting} | |
908 | |
909 @item q | |
910 Exit the selection process without inserting any reference into the | |
911 buffer.@refill | |
912 | |
913 @tablesubheading{Controlling what gets displayed} | |
914 @vindex reftex-label-menu-flags | |
915 The defaults for the following flags can be configured with the variable | |
916 @code{reftex-label-menu-flags} (@pxref{Options (Referencing Labels)}). | |
917 | |
918 @item c | |
919 Toggle the display of the one-line label definition context in the | |
920 selection buffer.@refill | |
921 | |
922 @item F | |
923 Toggle the display of the file borders of a multifile document in the | |
924 selection buffer.@refill | |
925 | |
926 @item t | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
927 Toggle the display of the table of contents in the selection buffer. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
928 With prefix @var{arg}, change the maximum level of toc entries displayed |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
929 to @var{arg}. Chapters are level 1, section are level 2.@refill |
25829 | 930 |
931 @item # | |
932 Toggle the display of a label counter in the selection buffer.@refill | |
933 | |
934 @item % | |
935 Toggle the display of labels hidden in comments in the selection | |
936 buffers. Sometimes, you may have commented out parts of your document. | |
937 If these parts contain label definitions, @b{Ref@TeX{}} can still display | |
938 and reference these labels.@refill | |
939 | |
940 @tablesubheading{Updating the buffer} | |
941 @item g | |
942 Update the menu. This will rebuilt the menu from the internal label | |
943 list, but not reparse the document (see @kbd{r}).@refill | |
944 | |
945 @item r | |
946 @vindex reftex-enable-partial-scans | |
947 Reparse the document to update the information on all labels and rebuild | |
948 the menu. If the variable @code{reftex-enable-partial-scans} is | |
949 non-@code{nil} and your document is a multifile document, this will | |
950 reparse only a part of the document (the file in which the label at | |
951 point was defined).@refill | |
952 | |
953 @item C-u r | |
954 Reparse the @emph{entire} document. | |
955 | |
956 @item s | |
957 Switch the label category. After prompting for another label category, | |
958 a menu for that category will be shown.@refill | |
959 | |
960 @item x | |
961 Reference a label from an external document. With the LaTeX package | |
962 @code{xr} it is possible to reference labels defined in another | |
963 document. This key will switch to the label menu of an external | |
964 document and let you select a label from there (@pxref{xr (LaTeX | |
965 package),,xr}).@refill | |
966 | |
967 @end table | |
968 | |
969 @vindex reftex-select-label-map | |
970 In order to define additional commands for the selection process, the | |
971 keymap @code{reftex-select-label-map} may be used.@refill | |
972 | |
973 @node Builtin Label Environments, Defining Label Environments, Referencing Labels, Labels and References | |
974 @section Builtin Label Environments | |
975 @cindex Builtin label environments | |
976 @cindex Label environments, builtin | |
977 @cindex Environments, builtin | |
978 @vindex reftex-label-alist | |
979 @vindex reftex-label-alist-builtin | |
980 | |
981 @b{Ref@TeX{}} needs to be aware of the environments which can be referenced | |
982 with a label (i.e. which carry their own counters). By default, @b{Ref@TeX{}} | |
983 recognizes all labeled environments and macros discussed in @cite{The | |
984 LaTeX Companion by Goossens, Mittelbach & Samarin, Addison-Wesley | |
985 1994.}. These are:@refill | |
986 | |
987 @itemize @minus | |
988 @item | |
989 @cindex @code{figure}, LaTeX environment | |
990 @cindex @code{figure*}, LaTeX environment | |
991 @cindex @code{table}, LaTeX environment | |
992 @cindex @code{table*}, LaTeX environment | |
993 @cindex @code{equation}, LaTeX environment | |
994 @cindex @code{eqnarray}, LaTeX environment | |
995 @cindex @code{enumerate}, LaTeX environment | |
996 @cindex @code{\footnote}, LaTeX macro | |
997 @cindex LaTeX macro @code{footnote} | |
998 @cindex LaTeX core | |
999 @code{figure}, @code{figure*}, @code{table}, @code{table*}, @code{equation}, | |
1000 @code{eqnarray}, @code{enumerate}, the @code{\footnote} macro (this is | |
1001 the LaTeX core stuff)@refill | |
1002 @item | |
1003 @cindex AMS-LaTeX | |
1004 @cindex @code{amsmath}, LaTeX package | |
1005 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{amsmath} | |
1006 @cindex @code{align}, AMS-LaTeX environment | |
1007 @cindex @code{gather}, AMS-LaTeX environment | |
1008 @cindex @code{multline}, AMS-LaTeX environment | |
1009 @cindex @code{flalign}, AMS-LaTeX environment | |
1010 @cindex @code{alignat}, AMS-LaTeX environment | |
1011 @cindex @code{xalignat}, AMS-LaTeX environment | |
1012 @cindex @code{xxalignat}, AMS-LaTeX environment | |
1013 @cindex @code{subequations}, AMS-LaTeX environment | |
1014 @code{align}, @code{gather}, @code{multline}, @code{flalign}, | |
1015 @code{alignat}, @code{xalignat}, @code{xxalignat}, @code{subequations} | |
1016 (from AMS-LaTeX's @file{amsmath.sty} package)@refill | |
1017 @item | |
1018 @cindex @code{endnote}, LaTeX package | |
1019 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{endnote} | |
1020 @cindex @code{\endnote}, LaTeX macro | |
1021 the @code{\endnote} macro (from @file{endnotes.sty}) | |
1022 @item | |
1023 @cindex @code{fancybox}, LaTeX package | |
1024 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{fancybox} | |
1025 @cindex @code{Beqnarray}, LaTeX environment | |
1026 @code{Beqnarray} (@file{fancybox.sty}) | |
1027 @item | |
1028 @cindex @code{floatfig}, LaTeX package | |
1029 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{floatfig} | |
1030 @cindex @code{floatingfig}, LaTeX environment | |
1031 @code{floatingfig} (@file{floatfig.sty}) | |
1032 @item | |
1033 @cindex @code{longtable}, LaTeX package | |
1034 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{longtable} | |
1035 @cindex @code{longtable}, LaTeX environment | |
1036 @code{longtable} (@file{longtable.sty}) | |
1037 @item | |
1038 @cindex @code{picinpar}, LaTeX package | |
1039 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{picinpar} | |
1040 @cindex @code{figwindow}, LaTeX environment | |
1041 @cindex @code{tabwindow}, LaTeX environment | |
1042 @code{figwindow}, @code{tabwindow} (@file{picinpar.sty}) | |
1043 @item | |
1044 @cindex @code{sidecap}, LaTeX package | |
1045 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{sidecap} | |
1046 @cindex @code{SCfigure}, LaTeX environment | |
1047 @cindex @code{SCtable}, LaTeX environment | |
1048 @code{SCfigure}, @code{SCtable} (@file{sidecap.sty}) | |
1049 @item | |
1050 @cindex @code{rotating}, LaTeX package | |
1051 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{rotating} | |
1052 @cindex @code{sidewaysfigure}, LaTeX environment | |
1053 @cindex @code{sidewaystable}, LaTeX environment | |
1054 @code{sidewaysfigure}, @code{sidewaystable} (@file{rotating.sty}) | |
1055 @item | |
1056 @cindex @code{subfig}, LaTeX package | |
1057 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{subfigure} | |
1058 @cindex @code{subfigure}, LaTeX environment | |
1059 @cindex @code{subfigure*}, LaTeX environment | |
1060 @code{subfigure}, @code{subfigure*}, the @code{\subfigure} macro | |
1061 (@file{subfigure.sty})@refill | |
1062 @item | |
1063 @cindex @code{supertab}, LaTeX package | |
1064 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{supertab} | |
1065 @cindex @code{supertabular}, LaTeX environment | |
1066 @code{supertabular} (@file{supertab.sty}) | |
1067 @item | |
1068 @cindex @code{wrapfig}, LaTeX package | |
1069 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{wrapfig} | |
1070 @cindex @code{wrapfigure}, LaTeX environment | |
1071 @code{wrapfigure} (@file{wrapfig.sty}) | |
1072 @end itemize | |
1073 | |
1074 If you want to use other labeled environments, defined with | |
1075 @code{\newtheorem}, @b{Ref@TeX{}} needs to be configured to recognize | |
1076 them (@pxref{Defining Label Environments}).@refill | |
1077 | |
1078 @node Defining Label Environments, Reference Info, Builtin Label Environments, Labels and References | |
1079 @section Defining Label Environments | |
1080 @cindex Label environments, defining | |
1081 | |
1082 @vindex reftex-label-alist | |
1083 @b{Ref@TeX{}} can be configured to recognize additional labeled | |
1084 environments and macros. This is done with the variable | |
1085 @code{reftex-label-alist} (@pxref{Options (Defining Label | |
1086 Environments)}). If you are not familiar with Lisp, you can use the | |
1087 @code{custom} library to configure this rather complex variable. To do | |
1088 this, use | |
1089 | |
1090 @example | |
1091 @kbd{M-x customize-variable @key{RET} reftex-label-alist @key{RET}} | |
1092 @end example | |
1093 | |
1094 @vindex reftex-label-alist-builtin | |
1095 Here we will discuss a few examples, in order to make things clearer. | |
1096 It can also be instructive to look at the constant | |
1097 @code{reftex-label-alist-builtin} which contains the entries for | |
1098 all the builtin environments and macros (@pxref{Builtin Label | |
1099 Environments}).@refill | |
1100 | |
1101 @menu | |
1102 * Theorem and Axiom:: Defined with @code{\newenvironment}. | |
1103 * Quick Equation:: When a macro sets the label type. | |
1104 * Figure Wrapper:: When a macro argument is a label. | |
1105 * Adding Magic Words:: Other words for other languages. | |
1106 * Using \eqref:: How to switch to this AMS-LaTeX macro. | |
1107 * Non-Standard Environments:: Environments without \begin and \end | |
1108 * Putting it Together:: How to combine many entries. | |
1109 @end menu | |
1110 | |
1111 @node Theorem and Axiom, Quick Equation, , Defining Label Environments | |
1112 @subsection Theorem and Axiom Environments | |
1113 @cindex @code{theorem}, newtheorem | |
1114 @cindex @code{axiom}, newtheorem | |
1115 @cindex @code{\newtheorem} | |
1116 | |
1117 Suppose you are using @code{\newtheorem} in LaTeX in order to define two | |
1118 new environments, @code{theorem} and @code{axiom}@refill | |
1119 | |
1120 @example | |
1121 \newtheorem@{axiom@}@{Axiom@} | |
1122 \newtheorem@{theorem@}@{Theorem@} | |
1123 @end example | |
1124 | |
1125 @noindent | |
1126 to be used like this: | |
1127 | |
1128 @example | |
1129 \begin@{axiom@} | |
1130 \label@{ax:first@} | |
1131 .... | |
1132 \end@{axiom@} | |
1133 @end example | |
1134 | |
1135 So we need to tell @b{Ref@TeX{}} that @code{theorem} and @code{axiom} are new | |
1136 labeled environments which define their own label categories. We can | |
1137 either use Lisp to do this (e.g. in @file{.emacs}) or use the custom | |
1138 library. With Lisp it would look like this | |
1139 | |
1140 @lisp | |
1141 (setq reftex-label-alist | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1142 '(("axiom" ?a "ax:" "~\\ref@{%s@}" nil ("axiom" "ax.") -2) |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1143 ("theorem" ?h "thr:" "~\\ref@{%s@}" t ("theorem" "th.") -3))) |
25829 | 1144 @end lisp |
1145 | |
1146 The type indicator characters @code{?a} and @code{?h} are used for | |
1147 prompts when @b{Ref@TeX{}} queries for a label type. @code{?h} | |
1148 was chosen for @code{theorem} since @code{?t} is already taken by | |
1149 @code{table}. Note that also @code{?s}, @code{?f}, @code{?e}, | |
1150 @code{?i}, @code{?n} are already used for standard environments.@refill | |
1151 | |
1152 @noindent | |
1153 The labels for Axioms and Theorems will have the prefixes @samp{ax:} and | |
1154 @samp{thr:}, respectively. @xref{AUCTeX}, for information on how | |
46684
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
1155 AUCTeX can use RefTeX to automatically create labels when a new environment |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
1156 is inserted into a buffer. Additionally, the following needs to be |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
1157 added to one's .emacs file before AUCTeX will automatically create |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
1158 labels for the new environments. |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
1159 |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
1160 @lisp |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
1161 (add-hook 'LaTeX-mode-hook |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
1162 (lambda () |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
1163 (LaTeX-add-environments |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
1164 '("axiom" LaTeX-env-label) |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
1165 '("theorem" LaTeX-env-label)))) |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
1166 @end lisp |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
1167 |
25829 | 1168 |
1169 @noindent | |
1170 The @samp{~\ref@{%s@}} is a format string indicating how to insert | |
1171 references to these labels.@refill | |
1172 | |
1173 @noindent | |
1174 The next item indicates how to grab context of the label definition.@refill | |
1175 @itemize @minus | |
1176 @item | |
1177 @code{t} means to get it from a default location (from the beginning of | |
1178 a @code{\macro} or after the @code{\begin} statement). @code{t} is | |
1179 @emph{not} a good choice for eqnarray and similar environments.@refill | |
1180 @item | |
1181 @code{nil} means to use the text right after the label definition.@refill | |
1182 @item | |
1183 For more complex ways of getting context, see the variable | |
1184 @code{reftex-label-alist} (@ref{Options (Defining Label | |
1185 Environments)}).@refill | |
1186 @end itemize | |
1187 | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1188 The following list of strings is used to guess the correct label type |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1189 from the word before point when creating a reference. E.g. if you |
25829 | 1190 write: @samp{As we have shown in Theorem} and then press @kbd{C-c )}, |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1191 @b{Ref@TeX{}} will know that you are looking for a theorem label and |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1192 restrict the menu to only these labels without even asking.@refill |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1193 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1194 The final item in each entry is the level at which the environment |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1195 should produce entries in the table of context buffer. If the number is |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1196 positive, the environment will produce numbered entries (like |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1197 @code{\section}), if it is negative the entries will be unnumbered (like |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1198 @code{\section*}). Use this only for environments which structure the |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1199 document similar to sectioning commands. For everything else, omit the |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1200 item.@refill |
25829 | 1201 |
1202 To do the same configuration with @code{customize}, you need to click on | |
1203 the @code{[INS]} button twice to create two templates and fill them in | |
1204 like this:@refill | |
1205 | |
1206 @example | |
1207 Reftex Label Alist: [Hide] | |
1208 [INS] [DEL] Package or Detailed : [Value Menu] Detailed: | |
1209 Environment or \macro : [Value Menu] String: axiom | |
1210 Type specification : [Value Menu] Char : a | |
1211 Label prefix string : [Value Menu] String: ax: | |
1212 Label reference format: [Value Menu] String: ~\ref@{%s@} | |
1213 Context method : [Value Menu] After label | |
1214 Magic words: | |
1215 [INS] [DEL] String: axiom | |
1216 [INS] [DEL] String: ax. | |
1217 [INS] | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1218 [X] Make TOC entry : [Value Menu] Level: -2 |
25829 | 1219 [INS] [DEL] Package or Detailed : [Value Menu] Detailed: |
1220 Environment or \macro : [Value Menu] String: theorem | |
1221 Type specification : [Value Menu] Char : h | |
1222 Label prefix string : [Value Menu] String: thr: | |
1223 Label reference format: [Value Menu] String: ~\ref@{%s@} | |
1224 Context method : [Value Menu] Default position | |
1225 Magic words: | |
1226 [INS] [DEL] String: theorem | |
1227 [INS] [DEL] String: theor. | |
1228 [INS] [DEL] String: th. | |
1229 [INS] | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1230 [X] Make TOC entry : [Value Menu] Level: -3 |
25829 | 1231 @end example |
1232 | |
1233 @vindex reftex-insert-label-flags | |
1234 @vindex reftex-label-menu-flags | |
1235 Depending on how you would like the label insertion and selection for | |
1236 the new environments to work, you might want to add the letters @samp{a} | |
1237 and @samp{h} to some of the flags in the variables | |
1238 @code{reftex-insert-label-flags} (@pxref{Options (Creating Labels)}) | |
1239 and @code{reftex-label-menu-flags} (@pxref{Options (Referencing | |
1240 Labels)}).@refill | |
1241 | |
1242 | |
1243 @node Quick Equation, Figure Wrapper, Theorem and Axiom , Defining Label Environments | |
1244 @subsection Quick Equation Macro | |
1245 @cindex Quick equation macro | |
1246 @cindex Macros as environment wrappers | |
1247 | |
1248 Suppose you would like to have a macro for quick equations. It | |
1249 could be defined like this: | |
1250 | |
1251 @example | |
1252 \newcommand@{\quickeq@}[1]@{\begin@{equation@} #1 \end@{equation@}@} | |
1253 @end example | |
1254 | |
1255 @noindent | |
1256 and used like this: | |
1257 | |
1258 @example | |
1259 Einstein's equation is \quickeq@{E=mc^2 \label@{eq:einstein@}@}. | |
1260 @end example | |
1261 | |
1262 We need to tell @b{Ref@TeX{}} that any label defined in the argument of the | |
1263 @code{\quickeq} is an equation label. Here is how to do this with lisp: | |
1264 | |
1265 @lisp | |
1266 (setq reftex-label-alist '(("\\quickeq@{@}" ?e nil nil 1 nil))) | |
1267 @end lisp | |
1268 | |
1269 The first element in this list is now the macro with empty braces as an | |
1270 @emph{image} of the macro arguments. @code{?e} indicates that this is | |
1271 an equation label, the different @code{nil} elements indicate to use the | |
1272 default values for equations. The @samp{1} as the fifth element | |
1273 indicates that the context of the label definition should be the 1st | |
1274 argument of the macro.@refill | |
1275 | |
1276 Here is again how this would look in the customization buffer: | |
1277 | |
1278 @example | |
1279 Reftex Label Alist: [Hide] | |
1280 [INS] [DEL] Package or Detailed : [Value Menu] Detailed: | |
1281 Environment or \macro : [Value Menu] String: \quickeq@{@} | |
1282 Type specification : [Value Menu] Char : e | |
1283 Label prefix string : [Value Menu] Default | |
1284 Label reference format: [Value Menu] Default | |
1285 Context method : [Value Menu] Macro arg nr: 1 | |
1286 Magic words: | |
1287 [INS] | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1288 [ ] Make TOC entry : [Value Menu] No entry |
25829 | 1289 @end example |
1290 | |
1291 @node Figure Wrapper, Adding Magic Words, Quick Equation, Defining Label Environments | |
1292 @subsection Figure Wrapping Macro | |
1293 @cindex Macros as environment wrappers | |
1294 @cindex Figure wrapping macro | |
1295 | |
1296 Suppose you want to make figures not directly with the figure | |
1297 environment, but with a macro like | |
1298 | |
1299 @example | |
1300 \newcommand@{\myfig@}[5][tbp]@{% | |
1301 \begin@{figure@}[#1] | |
1302 \epsimp[#5]@{#2@} | |
1303 \caption@{#3@} | |
1304 \label@{#4@} | |
1305 \end@{figure@}@} | |
1306 @end example | |
1307 | |
1308 @noindent | |
1309 which would be called like | |
1310 | |
1311 @example | |
1312 \myfig[htp]@{filename@}@{caption text@}@{label@}@{1@} | |
1313 @end example | |
1314 | |
1315 Now we need to tell @b{Ref@TeX{}} that the 4th argument of the | |
1316 @code{\myfig} macro @emph{is itself} a figure label, and where to find | |
1317 the context.@refill | |
1318 | |
1319 @lisp | |
1320 (setq reftex-label-alist | |
1321 '(("\\myfig[]@{@}@{@}@{*@}@{@}" ?f nil nil 3))) | |
1322 @end lisp | |
1323 | |
1324 The empty pairs of brackets indicate the different arguments of the | |
1325 @code{\myfig} macro. The @samp{*} marks the label argument. @code{?f} | |
1326 indicates that this is a figure label which will be listed together with | |
1327 labels from normal figure environments. The @code{nil} entries for | |
1328 prefix and reference format mean to use the defaults for figure labels. | |
1329 The @samp{3} for the context method means to grab the 3rd macro argument | |
1330 - the caption.@refill | |
1331 | |
1332 As a side effect of this configuration, @code{reftex-label} will now | |
1333 insert the required naked label (without the @code{\label} macro) when | |
1334 point is directly after the opening parenthesis of a @code{\myfig} macro | |
1335 argument.@refill | |
1336 | |
1337 Again, here the configuration in the customization buffer: | |
1338 | |
1339 @example | |
1340 [INS] [DEL] Package or Detailed : [Value Menu] Detailed: | |
1341 Environment or \macro : [Value Menu] String: \myfig[]@{@}@{@}@{*@}@{@} | |
1342 Type specification : [Value Menu] Char : f | |
1343 Label prefix string : [Value Menu] Default | |
1344 Label reference format: [Value Menu] Default | |
1345 Context method : [Value Menu] Macro arg nr: 3 | |
1346 Magic words: | |
1347 [INS] | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1348 [ ] Make TOC entry : [Value Menu] No entry |
25829 | 1349 @end example |
1350 | |
1351 @node Adding Magic Words, Using \eqref, Figure Wrapper, Defining Label Environments | |
1352 @subsection Adding Magic Words | |
1353 @cindex Magic words | |
1354 @cindex German magic words | |
1355 @cindex Label category | |
1356 | |
1357 Sometimes you don't want to define a new label environment or macro, but | |
1358 just change the information associated with a label category. Maybe you | |
1359 want to add some magic words, for another language. Changing only the | |
1360 information associated with a label category is done by giving | |
1361 @code{nil} for the environment name and then specify the items you want | |
1362 to define. Here is an example which adds German magic words to all | |
1363 predefined label categories.@refill | |
1364 | |
1365 @lisp | |
1366 (setq reftex-label-alist | |
1367 '((nil ?s nil nil nil ("Kapitel" "Kap." "Abschnitt" "Teil")) | |
1368 (nil ?e nil nil nil ("Gleichung" "Gl.")) | |
1369 (nil ?t nil nil nil ("Tabelle")) | |
1370 (nil ?f nil nil nil ("Figur" "Abbildung" "Abb.")) | |
1371 (nil ?n nil nil nil ("Anmerkung" "Anm.")) | |
1372 (nil ?i nil nil nil ("Punkt")))) | |
1373 @end lisp | |
1374 | |
1375 @node Using \eqref, Non-Standard Environments, Adding Magic Words, Defining Label Environments | |
1376 @subsection Using @code{\eqref} | |
1377 @cindex @code{\eqref}, AMS-LaTeX macro | |
1378 @cindex AMS-LaTeX | |
1379 @cindex Label category | |
1380 | |
1381 Another case where one only wants to change the information associated | |
1382 with the label category is to change the macro which is used for | |
1383 referencing the label. When working with the AMS-LaTeX stuff, you might | |
1384 prefer @code{\eqref} for doing equation references. Here is how to | |
1385 do this: | |
1386 | |
1387 @lisp | |
1388 (setq reftex-label-alist '((nil ?e nil "~\\eqref@{%s@}" nil nil))) | |
1389 @end lisp | |
1390 | |
1391 @b{Ref@TeX{}} has also a predefined symbol for this special purpose. The | |
1392 following is equivalent to the line above.@refill | |
1393 | |
1394 @lisp | |
1395 (setq reftex-label-alist '(AMSTeX)) | |
1396 @end lisp | |
1397 | |
1398 Note that this is automatically done by the @file{amsmath.el} style file | |
1399 of AUCTeX (@pxref{Style Files}) - so if you use AUCTeX, | |
1400 this configuration will not be necessary.@refill | |
1401 | |
1402 @node Non-Standard Environments, Putting it Together, Using \eqref, Defining Label Environments | |
1403 @subsection Non-standard Environments | |
1404 @cindex Non-standard environments | |
1405 @cindex Environments without @code{\begin} | |
1406 @cindex Special parser functions | |
1407 @cindex Parser functions, for special environments | |
1408 | |
1409 Some LaTeX packages define environment-like structures without using the | |
1410 standard @samp{\begin..\end} structure. @b{Ref@TeX{}} cannot parse | |
1411 these directly, but you can write your own special-purpose parser and | |
1412 use it instead of the name of an environment in an entry for | |
1413 @code{reftex-label-alist}. The function should check if point is | |
1414 currently in the special environment it was written to detect. If so, | |
1415 it must return a buffer position indicating the start of this | |
1416 environment. The return value must be @code{nil} on failure to detect | |
1417 the environment. The function is called with one argument @var{bound}. | |
1418 If non-@code{nil}, @var{bound} is a boundary for backwards searches | |
1419 which should be observed. We will discuss two examples.@refill | |
1420 | |
1421 @cindex LaTeX commands, abbreviated | |
1422 | |
1423 Some people define abbreviations for | |
1424 environments, like @code{\be} for @code{\begin@{equation@}}, and | |
1425 @code{\ee} for @code{\end@{equation@}}. The parser function would have | |
1426 to search backward for these macros. When the first match is | |
1427 @code{\ee}, point is not in this environment. When the first match is | |
1428 @code{\be}, point is in this environment and the function must return | |
1429 the beginning of the match. To avoid scanning too far, we can also look | |
46272 | 1430 for empty lines which cannot occur inside an equation environment. |
25829 | 1431 Here is the setup:@refill |
1432 | |
1433 @lisp | |
1434 ;; Setup entry in reftex-label-alist, using all defaults for equations | |
1435 (setq reftex-label-alist '((detect-be-ee ?e nil nil nil nil))) | |
1436 | |
1437 (defun detect-be-ee (bound) | |
1438 ;; Search backward for the macros or an empty line | |
1439 (if (re-search-backward | |
1440 "\\(^[ \t]*\n\\|\\\\ee\\>\\)\\|\\(\\\\be\\>\\)" bound t) | |
1441 (if (match-beginning 2) | |
1442 (match-beginning 2) ; Return start of environment | |
1443 nil) ; Return nil because env is closed | |
1444 nil)) ; Return nil for not found | |
1445 @end lisp | |
1446 | |
1447 @cindex @code{linguex}, LaTeX package | |
1448 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{linguex} | |
1449 A more complex example is the @file{linguex.sty} package which defines | |
1450 list macros @samp{\ex.}, @samp{\a.}, @samp{\b.} etc. for lists which are | |
1451 terminated by @samp{\z.} or by an empty line.@refill | |
1452 | |
1453 @example | |
1454 \ex. \label@{ex:12@} Some text in an exotic language ... | |
1455 \a. \label@{ex:13@} more stuff | |
1456 \b. \label@{ex:14@} still more stuff | |
1457 \a. List on a deeper level | |
1458 \b. Another item | |
1459 \b. and the third one | |
1460 \z. | |
1461 \b. Third item on this level. | |
1462 | |
1463 ... text after the empty line terminating all lists | |
1464 @end example | |
1465 | |
1466 The difficulty is that the @samp{\a.} lists can nest and that an empty | |
1467 line terminates all list levels in one go. So we have to count nesting | |
1468 levels between @samp{\a.} and @samp{\z.}. Here is the implementation | |
1469 for @b{Ref@TeX{}}. | |
1470 | |
1471 @lisp | |
1472 (setq reftex-label-alist | |
1473 '((detect-linguex ?x "ex:" "~\\ref@{%s@}" nil ("Example" "Ex.")))) | |
1474 | |
1475 (defun detect-linguex (bound) | |
1476 (let ((cnt 0)) | |
1477 (catch 'exit | |
1478 (while | |
1479 ;; Search backward for all possible delimiters | |
1480 (re-search-backward | |
1481 (concat "\\(^[ \t]*\n\\)\\|\\(\\\\z\\.\\)\\|" | |
1482 "\\(\\ex[ig]?\\.\\)\\|\\(\\\\a\\.\\)") | |
1483 nil t) | |
1484 ;; Check which delimiter was matched. | |
1485 (cond | |
1486 ((match-beginning 1) | |
1487 ;; empty line terminates all - return nil | |
1488 (throw 'exit nil)) | |
1489 ((match-beginning 2) | |
1490 ;; \z. terminates one list level - decrease nesting count | |
1491 (decf cnt)) | |
1492 ((match-beginning 3) | |
1493 ;; \ex. : return match unless there was a \z. on this level | |
1494 (throw 'exit (if (>= cnt 0) (match-beginning 3) nil))) | |
1495 ((match-beginning 4) | |
1496 ;; \a. : return match when on level 0, otherwise | |
1497 ;; increment nesting count | |
1498 (if (>= cnt 0) | |
1499 (throw 'exit (match-beginning 4)) | |
1500 (incf cnt)))))))) | |
1501 @end lisp | |
1502 | |
1503 @node Putting it Together, , Non-Standard Environments, Defining Label Environments | |
1504 @subsection Putting it all together | |
1505 | |
1506 When you have to put several entries into @code{reftex-label-alist}, just | |
1507 put them after each other in a list, or create that many templates in | |
1508 the customization buffer. Here is a lisp example which uses several of | |
1509 the entries described above: | |
1510 | |
1511 @lisp | |
1512 (setq reftex-label-alist | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1513 '(("axiom" ?a "ax:" "~\\ref@{%s@}" nil ("axiom" "ax.") -2) |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1514 ("theorem" ?h "thr:" "~\\ref@{%s@}" t ("theorem" "theor." "th.") -3) |
25829 | 1515 ("\\quickeq@{@}" ?e nil nil 1 nil) |
1516 AMSTeX | |
1517 ("\\myfig[]@{@}@{@}@{*@}@{@}" ?f nil nil 3) | |
1518 (detect-linguex ?x "ex:" "~\\ref@{%s@}" nil ("Example" "Ex.")))) | |
1519 @end lisp | |
1520 | |
1521 @node Reference Info, xr (LaTeX package), Defining Label Environments, Labels and References | |
1522 @section Reference Info | |
1523 @findex reftex-view-crossref | |
1524 @findex reftex-mouse-view-crossref | |
1525 @cindex Cross-references, displaying | |
1526 @cindex Reference info | |
1527 @cindex Displaying cross-references | |
1528 @cindex Viewing cross-references | |
1529 @kindex C-c & | |
37999
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
1530 @kindex S-mouse-2 |
25829 | 1531 |
47050
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
1532 When point is idle for more than @code{reftex-idle-time} seconds on the |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
1533 argument of a @code{\ref} macro, the echo area will display some |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
1534 information about the label referenced there. Note that the information |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
1535 is only displayed if the echo area is not occupied by a different |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
1536 message. |
25829 | 1537 |
1538 @b{Ref@TeX{}} can also display the label definition corresponding to a | |
1539 @code{\ref} macro, or all reference locations corresponding to a | |
1540 @code{\label} macro. @xref{Viewing Cross-References}, for more | |
1541 information.@refill | |
1542 | |
1543 @node xr (LaTeX package), varioref (LaTeX package), Reference Info, Labels and References | |
1544 @section @code{xr}: Cross-Document References | |
1545 @cindex @code{xr}, LaTeX package | |
1546 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{xr} | |
1547 @cindex @code{\externaldocument} | |
1548 @cindex External documents | |
1549 @cindex References to external documents | |
1550 @cindex Cross-document references | |
1551 | |
1552 The LaTeX package @code{xr} makes it possible to create references to | |
1553 labels defined in external documents. The preamble of a document using | |
1554 @code{xr} will contain something like this:@refill | |
1555 | |
1556 @example | |
1557 \usepackage@{xr@} | |
1558 \externaldocument[V1-]@{volume1@} | |
1559 \externaldocument[V3-]@{volume3@} | |
1560 @end example | |
1561 | |
1562 @noindent | |
1563 and we can make references to any labels defined in these | |
1564 external documents by using the prefixes @samp{V1-} and @samp{V3-}, | |
1565 respectively.@refill | |
1566 | |
1567 @b{Ref@TeX{}} can be used to create such references as well. Start the | |
1568 referencing process normally, by pressing @kbd{C-c )}. Select a label | |
1569 type if necessary. When you see the label selection buffer, pressing | |
1570 @kbd{x} will switch to the label selection buffer of one of the external | |
1571 documents. You may then select a label as before and @b{Ref@TeX{}} will | |
1572 insert it along with the required prefix.@refill | |
1573 | |
1574 For this kind of inter-document cross-references, saving of parsing | |
1575 information and the use of multiple selection buffers can mean a large | |
1576 speed-up (@pxref{Optimizations}).@refill | |
1577 | |
1578 @node varioref (LaTeX package), fancyref (LaTeX package), xr (LaTeX package), Labels and References | |
1579 @section @code{varioref}: Variable Page References | |
1580 @cindex @code{varioref}, LaTeX package | |
1581 @cindex @code{\vref} | |
1582 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{varioref} | |
1583 @vindex reftex-vref-is-default | |
1584 @code{varioref} is a frequently used LaTeX package to create | |
1585 cross--references with page information. When you want to make a | |
1586 reference with the @code{\vref} macro, just press the @kbd{v} key in the | |
1587 selection buffer to toggle between @code{\ref} and @code{\vref} | |
1588 (@pxref{Referencing Labels}). The mode line of the selection buffer | |
1589 shows the current status of this switch. If you find that you almost | |
1590 always use @code{\vref}, you may want to make it the default by | |
1591 customizing the variable @code{reftex-vref-is-default}. If this | |
1592 toggling seems too inconvenient, you can also use the command | |
1593 @code{reftex-varioref-vref}@footnote{bind it to @kbd{C-c v}.}. | |
1594 Or use AUCTeX to create your macros (@pxref{AUCTeX}).@refill | |
1595 | |
1596 @node fancyref (LaTeX package), , varioref (LaTeX package), Labels and References | |
1597 @section @code{fancyref}: Fancy Cross References | |
1598 @cindex @code{fancyref}, LaTeX package | |
1599 @cindex @code{\fref} | |
1600 @cindex @code{\Fref} | |
1601 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{fancyref} | |
1602 @vindex reftex-fref-is-default | |
1603 @code{fancyref} is a LaTeX package where a macro call like | |
1604 @code{\fref@{@var{fig:map-of-germany}@}} creates not only the number of | |
1605 the referenced counter but also the complete text around it, like | |
1606 @samp{Figure 3 on the preceding page}. In order to make it work you | |
1607 need to use label prefixes like @samp{fig:} consistently - something | |
1608 @b{Ref@TeX{}} does automatically. When you want to make a reference | |
1609 with the @code{\fref} macro, just press the @kbd{V} key in the selection | |
1610 buffer to cycle between @code{\ref}, @code{\fref} and @code{\Fref} | |
1611 (@pxref{Referencing Labels}). The mode line of the selection buffer | |
1612 shows the current status of this switch. If this cycling seems | |
1613 inconvenient, you can also use the commands @code{reftex-fancyref-fref} | |
1614 and @code{reftex-fancyref-Fref}@footnote{bind them to @kbd{C-c | |
1615 f} and @kbd{C-c F}.}. Or use AUCTeX to create your macros | |
1616 (@pxref{AUCTeX}).@refill | |
1617 | |
1618 @node Citations, Index Support, Labels and References, Top | |
1619 @chapter Citations | |
1620 @cindex Citations | |
1621 @cindex @code{\cite} | |
1622 | |
1623 Citations in LaTeX are done with the @code{\cite} macro or variations of | |
1624 it. The argument of the macro is a citation key which identifies an | |
1625 article or book in either a BibTeX database file or in an explicit | |
1626 @code{thebibliography} environment in the document. @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s | |
1627 support for citations helps to select the correct key quickly.@refill | |
1628 | |
1629 @menu | |
1630 * Creating Citations:: How to create them. | |
1631 * Citation Styles:: Natbib, Harvard, Chicago and Co. | |
1632 * Citation Info:: View the corresponding database entry. | |
1633 * Chapterbib and Bibunits:: Multiple bibliographies in a Document. | |
1634 * Citations Outside LaTeX:: How to make citations in Emails etc. | |
1635 @end menu | |
1636 | |
1637 @node Creating Citations, Citation Styles, , Citations | |
1638 @section Creating Citations | |
1639 @cindex Creating citations | |
1640 @cindex Citations, creating | |
1641 @findex reftex-citation | |
1642 @kindex C-c [ | |
1643 @cindex Selection buffer, citations | |
1644 @cindex Selection process | |
1645 | |
1646 In order to create a citation, press @kbd{C-c [}. @b{Ref@TeX{}} then | |
1647 prompts for a regular expression which will be used to search through | |
1648 the database and present the list of matches to choose from in a | |
1649 selection process similar to that for selecting labels | |
1650 (@pxref{Referencing Labels}).@refill | |
1651 | |
1652 The regular expression uses an extended syntax: @samp{&&} defines a | |
1653 logic @code{and} for regular expressions. For example | |
1654 @samp{Einstein&&Bose} will match all articles which mention | |
1655 Bose-Einstein condensation, or which are co-authored by Bose and | |
1656 Einstein. When entering the regular expression, you can complete on | |
46918
82d113655734
Minor spelling and grammar corrections.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
46684
diff
changeset
|
1657 known citation keys. RefTeX also offers a default when prompting for a |
46684
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
1658 regular expression. This default is the word before the cursor or the |
46918
82d113655734
Minor spelling and grammar corrections.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
46684
diff
changeset
|
1659 word before the current @samp{\cite} command. Sometimes this may be a |
46684
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
1660 good search key.@refill |
25829 | 1661 |
1662 @cindex @code{\bibliography} | |
1663 @cindex @code{thebibliography}, LaTeX environment | |
1664 @cindex @code{BIBINPUTS}, environment variable | |
1665 @cindex @code{TEXBIB}, environment variable | |
1666 @b{Ref@TeX{}} prefers to use BibTeX database files specified with a | |
1667 @code{\bibliography} macro to collect its information. Just like | |
1668 BibTeX, it will search for the specified files in the current directory | |
1669 and along the path given in the environment variable @code{BIBINPUTS}. | |
1670 If you do not use BibTeX, but the document contains an explicit | |
1671 @code{thebibliography} environment, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will collect its | |
1672 information from there. Note that in this case the information | |
1673 presented in the selection buffer will just be a copy of relevant | |
1674 @code{\bibitem} entries, not the structured listing available with | |
1675 BibTeX database files.@refill | |
1676 | |
1677 @kindex ? | |
1678 In the selection buffer, the following keys provide special commands. A | |
1679 summary of this information is always available from the selection | |
1680 process by pressing @kbd{?}.@refill | |
1681 | |
1682 @table @kbd | |
1683 @tablesubheading{General} | |
1684 @item ? | |
1685 Show a summary of available commands. | |
1686 | |
1687 @item 0-9,- | |
1688 Prefix argument. | |
1689 | |
1690 @tablesubheading{Moving around} | |
1691 @item n | |
1692 Go to next article. | |
1693 | |
1694 @item p | |
1695 Go to previous article. | |
1696 | |
1697 @tablesubheading{Access to full database entries} | |
1698 @item @key{SPC} | |
1699 Show the database entry corresponding to the article at point, in | |
1700 another window. See also the @kbd{f} key.@refill | |
1701 | |
1702 @item f | |
1703 Toggle follow mode. When follow mode is active, the other window will | |
1704 always display the full database entry of the current article. This is | |
1705 equivalent to pressing @key{SPC} after each cursor motion. With BibTeX | |
1706 entries, follow mode can be rather slow.@refill | |
1707 | |
1708 @tablesubheading{Selecting entries and creating the citation} | |
1709 @item @key{RET} | |
1710 Insert a citation referencing the article at point into the buffer from | |
1711 which the selection process was started.@refill | |
1712 | |
37999
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
1713 @item mouse-2 |
25829 | 1714 @vindex reftex-highlight-selection |
1715 Clicking with mouse button 2 on a citation will accept it like @key{RET} | |
1716 would. See also variable @code{reftex-highlight-selection}, @ref{Options | |
1717 (Misc)}.@refill | |
1718 | |
1719 @item m | |
1720 Mark the current entry. When one or several entries are marked, | |
1721 pressing @kbd{a} or @kbd{A} accepts all marked entries. Also, | |
1722 @key{RET} behaves like the @kbd{a} key. | |
1723 | |
1724 @item u | |
1725 Unmark a marked entry. | |
1726 | |
1727 @item a | |
1728 Accept all (marked) entries in the selection buffer and create a single | |
1729 @code{\cite} macro referring to them.@refill | |
1730 | |
1731 @item A | |
1732 Accept all (marked) entries in the selection buffer and create a | |
1733 separate @code{\cite} macro for each of it.@refill | |
1734 | |
1735 @item @key{TAB} | |
1736 Enter a citation key with completion. This may also be a key which does | |
1737 not yet exist. | |
1738 | |
1739 @item . | |
1740 Show insertion point in another window. This is the point from where you | |
1741 called @code{reftex-citation}.@refill | |
1742 | |
1743 @tablesubheading{Exiting} | |
1744 @item q | |
1745 Exit the selection process without inserting a citation into the | |
1746 buffer.@refill | |
1747 | |
1748 @tablesubheading{Updating the buffer} | |
1749 | |
1750 @item g | |
1751 Start over with a new regular expression. The full database will be | |
1752 rescanned with the new expression (see also @kbd{r}).@refill | |
1753 | |
1754 @c FIXME: Should we use something else here? r is usually rescan! | |
1755 @item r | |
1756 Refine the current selection with another regular expression. This will | |
1757 @emph{not} rescan the entire database, but just the already selected | |
1758 entries.@refill | |
1759 | |
1760 @end table | |
1761 | |
1762 @vindex reftex-select-bib-map | |
1763 In order to define additional commands for this selection process, the | |
1764 keymap @code{reftex-select-bib-map} may be used.@refill | |
1765 | |
1766 @node Citation Styles, Citation Info, Creating Citations, Citations | |
1767 @section Citation Styles | |
1768 @cindex Citation styles | |
1769 @cindex Citation styles, @code{natbib} | |
1770 @cindex Citation styles, @code{harvard} | |
1771 @cindex Citation styles, @code{chicago} | |
1772 @cindex @code{natbib}, citation style | |
1773 @cindex @code{harvard}, citation style | |
1774 @cindex @code{chicago}, citation style | |
1775 | |
1776 @vindex reftex-cite-format | |
1777 The standard LaTeX macro @code{\cite} works well with numeric or simple | |
1778 key citations. To deal with the more complex task of author-year | |
1779 citations as used in many natural sciences, a variety of packages has | |
1780 been developed which define derived forms of the @code{\cite} macro. | |
1781 @b{Ref@TeX{}} can be configured to produce these citation macros as well by | |
1782 setting the variable @code{reftex-cite-format}. For the most commonly | |
1783 used packages (@code{natbib}, @code{harvard}, @code{chicago}) this may | |
1784 be done from the menu, under @code{Ref->Citation Styles}. Since there | |
1785 are usually several macros to create the citations, executing | |
1786 @code{reftex-citation} (@kbd{C-c [}) starts by prompting for the correct | |
1787 macro. For the Natbib style, this looks like this: | |
1788 | |
1789 @example | |
1790 SELECT A CITATION FORMAT | |
1791 | |
1792 [^M] \cite@{%l@} | |
1793 [t] \citet@{%l@} | |
1794 [T] \citet*@{%l@} | |
1795 [p] \citep@{%l@} | |
1796 [P] \citep*@{%l@} | |
1797 [e] \citep[e.g.][]@{%l@} | |
1798 [s] \citep[see][]@{%l@} | |
1799 [a] \citeauthor@{%l@} | |
1800 [A] \citeauthor*@{%l@} | |
1801 [y] \citeyear@{%l@} | |
1802 @end example | |
1803 | |
1804 Following the most generic of these packages, @code{natbib}, the builtin | |
1805 citation packages always accept the @kbd{t} key for a @emph{textual} | |
1806 citation (like: @code{Jones et al. (1997) have shown...}) as well as | |
1807 the @kbd{p} key for a parenthetical citation (like: @code{As shown | |
1808 earlier (Jones et al, 1997)}).@refill | |
1809 | |
1810 To make one of these styles the default, customize the variable | |
1811 @code{reftex-cite-format} or put into @file{.emacs}: | |
1812 | |
1813 @lisp | |
1814 (setq reftex-cite-format 'natbib) | |
1815 @end lisp | |
1816 | |
1817 You can also use AUCTeX style files to automatically set the | |
1818 citation style based on the @code{usepackage} commands in a given | |
1819 document. @xref{Style Files}, for information on how to set up the style | |
1820 files correctly.@refill | |
1821 | |
1822 @node Citation Info, Chapterbib and Bibunits, Citation Styles, Citations, Top | |
1823 @section Citation Info | |
1824 @cindex Displaying citations | |
1825 @cindex Citations, displaying | |
1826 @cindex Citation info | |
1827 @cindex Viewing citations | |
1828 @kindex C-c & | |
37999
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
1829 @kindex S-mouse-2 |
25829 | 1830 @findex reftex-view-crossref |
1831 @findex reftex-mouse-view-crossref | |
1832 | |
47050
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
1833 When point is idle for more than @code{reftex-idle-time} seconds on the |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
1834 argument of a @code{\cite} macro, the echo area will display some |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
1835 information about the article cited there. Note that the information is |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
1836 only displayed if the echo area is not occupied by a different message. |
25829 | 1837 |
1838 @b{Ref@TeX{}} can also display the @code{\bibitem} or BibTeX database | |
1839 entry corresponding to a @code{\cite} macro, or all citation locations | |
1840 corresponding to a @code{\bibitem} or BibTeX database entry. | |
1841 @xref{Viewing Cross-References}.@refill | |
1842 | |
1843 @node Chapterbib and Bibunits, Citations Outside LaTeX, Citation Info, Citations | |
1844 @section Chapterbib and Bibunits | |
1845 @cindex @code{chapterbib}, LaTeX package | |
1846 @cindex @code{bibunits}, LaTeX package | |
1847 @cindex Bibliographies, multiple | |
1848 | |
1849 @code{chapterbib} and @code{bibunits} are two LaTeX packages which | |
1850 produce multiple bibliographies in a document. This is no problem for | |
1851 @b{Ref@TeX{}} as long as all bibliographies use the same BibTeX database | |
1852 files. If they do not, it is best to have each document part in a | |
1853 separate file (as it is required for @code{chapterbib} anyway). Then | |
1854 @b{Ref@TeX{}} will still scan the locally relevant databases correctly. If | |
1855 you have multiple bibliographies within a @emph{single file}, this may | |
1856 or may not be the case. | |
1857 | |
1858 @node Citations Outside LaTeX, , Chapterbib and Bibunits, Citations | |
1859 @section Citations outside LaTeX | |
1860 @cindex Citations outside LaTeX | |
1861 @vindex reftex-default-bibliography | |
1862 | |
1863 The command @code{reftex-citation} can also be executed outside a LaTeX | |
1864 buffer. This can be useful to reference articles in the mail buffer and | |
1865 other documents. You should @emph{not} enter @code{reftex-mode} for | |
1866 this, just execute the command. The list of BibTeX files will in this | |
1867 case be taken from the variable @code{reftex-default-bibliography}. | |
1868 Setting the variable @code{reftex-cite-format} to the symbol | |
1869 @code{locally} does a decent job of putting all relevant information | |
1870 about a citation directly into the buffer. Here is the lisp code to add | |
1871 the @kbd{C-c [} binding to the mail buffer. It also provides a local | |
1872 binding for @code{reftex-cite-format}.@refill | |
1873 | |
1874 @lisp | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1875 (add-hook 'mail-setup-hook |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1876 (lambda () (define-key mail-mode-map "\C-c[" |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1877 (lambda () (interactive) |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1878 (require 'reftex) |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1879 (let ((reftex-cite-format 'locally)) |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1880 (reftex-citation)))))) |
25829 | 1881 @end lisp |
1882 | |
1883 @node Index Support, Viewing Cross-References, Citations, Top | |
1884 @chapter Index Support | |
1885 @cindex Index Support | |
1886 @cindex @code{\index} | |
1887 | |
1888 LaTeX has builtin support for creating an Index. The LaTeX core | |
1889 supports two different indices, the standard index and a glossary. With | |
1890 the help of special LaTeX packages (@file{multind.sty} or | |
1891 @file{index.sty}), any number of indices can be supported. | |
1892 | |
1893 Index entries are created with the @code{\index@{@var{entry}@}} macro. | |
1894 All entries defined in a document are written out to the @file{.aux} | |
1895 file. A separate tool must be used to convert this information into a | |
1896 nicely formatted index. Tools used with LaTeX include @code{MakeIndex} | |
1897 and @code{xindy}.@refill | |
1898 | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1899 Indexing is a very difficult task. It must follow strict conventions to |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1900 make the index consistent and complete. There are basically two |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1901 approaches one can follow, and both have their merits. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1902 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1903 @enumerate |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1904 @item |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1905 Part of the indexing should already be done with the markup. The |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1906 document structure should be reflected in the index, so when starting |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1907 new sections, the basic topics of the section should be indexed. If the |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1908 document contains definitions, theorems or the like, these should all |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1909 correspond to appropriate index entries. This part of the index can |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1910 very well be developed along with the document. Often it is worthwhile |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1911 to define special purpose macros which define an item and at the same |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1912 time make an index entry, possibly with special formatting to make the |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1913 reference page in the index bold or underlined. To make @b{Ref@TeX{}} |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1914 support for indexing possible, these special macros must be added to |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1915 @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s configuration (@pxref{Defining Index Macros}).@refill |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1916 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1917 @item |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1918 The rest of the index is often just a collection of where in the |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1919 document certain words or phrases are being used. This part is |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1920 difficult to develop along with the document, because consistent entries |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1921 for each occurrence are needed and are best selected when the document |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1922 is ready. @b{Ref@TeX{}} supports this with an @emph{index phrases file} |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1923 which collects phrases and helps indexing the phrases globally.@refill |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1924 @end enumerate |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1925 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1926 Before you start, you need to make sure that @b{Ref@TeX{}} knows about |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1927 the index style being used in the current document. @b{Ref@TeX{}} has |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1928 builtin support for the default @code{\index} and @code{\glossary} |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1929 macros. Other LaTeX packages, like the @file{multind} or @file{index} |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1930 package, redefine the @code{\index} macro to have an additional |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1931 argument, and @b{Ref@TeX{}} needs to be configured for those. A |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1932 sufficiently new version of AUCTeX (9.10c or later) will do this |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1933 automatically. If you really don't use AUCTeX (you should!), this |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1934 configuration needs to be done by hand with the menu (@code{Ref->Index |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1935 Style}), or globally for all your documents with@refill |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1936 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1937 @lisp |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1938 (setq reftex-index-macros '(multind)) @r{or} |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1939 (setq reftex-index-macros '(index)) |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1940 @end lisp |
25829 | 1941 |
1942 @menu | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1943 * Creating Index Entries:: Macros and completion of entries. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1944 * The Index Phrases File:: A special file for global indexing. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1945 * Displaying and Editing the Index:: The index editor. |
25829 | 1946 * Builtin Index Macros:: The index macros RefTeX knows about. |
1947 * Defining Index Macros:: ... and macros it doesn't. | |
1948 @end menu | |
1949 | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1950 @node Creating Index Entries, The Index Phrases File, , Index Support |
25829 | 1951 @section Creating Index Entries |
1952 @cindex Creating index entries | |
1953 @cindex Index entries, creating | |
1954 @kindex C-c < | |
1955 @findex reftex-index | |
1956 @kindex C-c / | |
1957 @findex reftex-index-selection-or-word | |
1958 | |
1959 In order to index the current selection or the word at the cursor press | |
1960 @kbd{C-c /} (@code{reftex-index-selection-or-word}). This causes the | |
1961 selection or word @samp{@var{word}} to be replaced with | |
1962 @samp{\index@{@var{word}@}@var{word}}. The macro which is used | |
1963 (@code{\index} by default) can be configured with the variable | |
1964 @code{reftex-index-default-macro}. When the command is called with a | |
1965 prefix argument (@kbd{C-u C-c /}), you get a chance to edit the | |
1966 generated index entry. Use this to change the case of the word or to | |
1967 make the entry a subentry, for example by entering | |
1968 @samp{main!sub!@var{word}}. When called with two raw @kbd{C-u} prefixes | |
1969 (@kbd{C-u C-u C-c /}), you will be asked for the index macro as well. | |
1970 When there is nothing selected and no word at point, this command will | |
1971 just call @code{reftex-index}, described below. | |
1972 | |
1973 In order to create a general index entry, press @kbd{C-c <} | |
1974 (@code{reftex-index}). @b{Ref@TeX{}} will prompt for one of the | |
1975 available index macros and for its arguments. Completion will be | |
1976 available for the index entry and, if applicable, the index tag. The | |
1977 index tag is a string identifying one of multiple indices. With the | |
1978 @file{multind} and @file{index} packages, this tag is the first argument | |
1979 to the redefined @code{\index} macro.@refill | |
1980 | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1981 @node The Index Phrases File, Displaying and Editing the Index, Creating Index Entries, Index Support |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1982 @section The Index Phrases File |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1983 @cindex Index phrase file |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1984 @cindex Phrase file |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1985 @kindex C-c | |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1986 @findex reftex-index-visit-phrases-buffer |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1987 @cindex Macro definition lines, in phrase buffer |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1988 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1989 @b{Ref@TeX{}} maintains a file in which phrases can be collected for |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1990 later indexing. The file is located in the same directory as the master |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1991 file of the document and has the extension @file{.rip} (@b{R}eftex |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1992 @b{I}ndex @b{P}hrases). You can create or visit the file with @kbd{C-c |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1993 |} (@code{reftex-index-visit-phrases-buffer}). If the file is empty it |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1994 is initialized by inserting a file header which contains the definition |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1995 of the available index macros. This list is initialized from |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1996 @code{reftex-index-macros} (@pxref{Defining Index Macros}). You can |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1997 edit the header as needed, but if you define new LaTeX indexing macros, |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1998 don't forget to add them to @code{reftex-index-macros} as well. Here is |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1999 a phrase file header example:@refill |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2000 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2001 @example |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2002 % -*- mode: reftex-index-phrases -*- |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2003 % Key Macro Format Repeat |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2004 %---------------------------------------------------------- |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2005 >>>INDEX_MACRO_DEFINITION: i \index@{%s@} t |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2006 >>>INDEX_MACRO_DEFINITION: I \index*@{%s@} nil |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2007 >>>INDEX_MACRO_DEFINITION: g \glossary@{%s@} t |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2008 >>>INDEX_MACRO_DEFINITION: n \index*[name]@{%s@} nil |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2009 %---------------------------------------------------------- |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2010 @end example |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2011 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2012 The macro definition lines consist of a unique letter identifying a |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2013 macro, a format string and the @var{repeat} flag, all separated by |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2014 @key{TAB}. The format string shows how the macro is to be applied, the |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2015 @samp{%s} will be replaced with the index entry. The repeat flag |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2016 indicates if @var{word} is indexed by the macro as |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2017 @samp{\index@{@var{word}@}} (@var{repeat} = @code{nil}) or as |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2018 @samp{\index@{@var{word}@}@var{word}} (@var{repeat} = @code{t}). In the |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2019 above example it is assumed that the macro @code{\index*@{@var{word}@}} |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2020 already typesets its argument in the text, so that it is unnecessary to |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2021 repeat @var{word} outside the macro.@refill |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2022 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2023 @menu |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2024 * Collecting Phrases:: Collecting from document or external. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2025 * Consistency Checks:: Check for duplicates etc. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2026 * Global Indexing:: The interactive indexing process. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2027 @end menu |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2028 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2029 @node Collecting Phrases, Consistency Checks, , The Index Phrases File |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2030 @subsection Collecting Phrases |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2031 @cindex Collecting index phrases |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2032 @cindex Index phrases, collection |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2033 @cindex Phrases, collecting |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2034 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2035 Phrases for indexing can be collected while writing the document. The |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2036 command @kbd{C-c \} (@code{reftex-index-phrase-selection-or-word}) |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2037 copies the current selection (if active) or the word near point into the |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2038 phrases buffer. It then selects this buffer, so that the phrase line |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2039 can be edited. To return to the LaTeX document, press @kbd{C-c C-c} |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2040 (@code{reftex-index-phrases-save-and-return}). |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2041 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2042 You can also prepare the list of index phrases in a different way and |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2043 copy it into the phrases file. For example you might want to start from |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2044 a word list of the document and remove all words which should not be |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2045 indexed. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2046 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2047 The phrase lines in the phrase buffer must have a specific format. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2048 @b{Ref@TeX{}} will use font-lock to indicate if a line has the proper |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2049 format. A phrase line looks like this: |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2050 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2051 @example |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2052 [@var{key}] <TABs> @var{phrase} [<TABs> @var{arg}[&&@var{arg}]... [ || @var{arg}]...] |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2053 @end example |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2054 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2055 @code{<TABs>} stands for white space containing at least one @key{TAB}. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2056 @var{key} must be at the start of the line and is the character |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2057 identifying one of the macros defined in the file header. It is |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2058 optional - when omitted, the first macro definition line in the file |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2059 will be used for this phrase. The @var{phrase} is the phrase to be |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2060 searched for when indexing. It may contain several words separated by |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2061 spaces. By default the search phrase is also the text entered as |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2062 argument of the index macro. If you want the index entry to be |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2063 different from the search phrase, enter another @key{TAB} and the index |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2064 argument @var{arg}. If you want to have each match produce several |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2065 index entries, separate the different index arguments with @samp{ && |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2066 }@footnote{@samp{&&} with optional spaces, see |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2067 @code{reftex-index-phrases-logical-and-regexp}.}. If you want to be |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2068 able to choose at each match between several different index arguments, |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2069 separate them with @samp{ || }@footnote{@samp{||} with optional spaces, |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2070 see @code{reftex-index-phrases-logical-or-regexp}.}. Here is an |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2071 example:@refill |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2072 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2073 @example |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2074 %-------------------------------------------------------------------- |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2075 I Sun |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2076 i Planet Planets |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2077 i Vega Stars!Vega |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2078 Jupiter Planets!Jupiter |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2079 i Mars Planets!Mars || Gods!Mars || Chocolate Bars!Mars |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2080 i Pluto Planets!Pluto && Kuiper Belt Objects!Pluto |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2081 @end example |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2082 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2083 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2084 So @samp{Sun} will be indexed directly as @samp{\index*@{Sun@}}, while |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2085 @samp{Planet} will be indexed as @samp{\index@{Planets@}Planet}. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2086 @samp{Vega} will be indexed as a subitem of @samp{Stars}. The |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2087 @samp{Jupiter} line will also use the @samp{i} macro as it was the first |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2088 macro definition in the file header (see above example). At each |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2089 occurrence of @samp{Mars} you will be able choose between indexing it as |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2090 a subitem of @samp{Planets}, @samp{Gods} or @samp{Chocolate Bars}. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2091 Finally, every occurrence of @samp{Pluto} will be indexed as |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2092 @samp{\index@{Planets!Pluto@}\index@{Kuiper Belt Objects!Pluto@}Pluto} |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2093 and will therefore create two different index entries.@refill |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2094 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2095 @node Consistency Checks, Global Indexing, Collecting Phrases, The Index Phrases File |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2096 @subsection Consistency Checks |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2097 @cindex Index phrases, consistency checks |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2098 @cindex Phrases, consistency checks |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2099 @cindex Consistency check for index phrases |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2100 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2101 @kindex C-c C-s |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2102 Before indexing the phrases in the phrases buffer, they should be |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2103 checked carefully for consistency. A first step is to sort the phrases |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2104 alphabetically - this is done with the command @kbd{C-c C-s} |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2105 (@code{reftex-index-sort-phrases}). It will sort all phrases in the |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2106 buffer alphabetically by search phrase. If you want to group certain |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2107 phrases and only sort within the groups, insert empty lines between the |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2108 groups. Sorting will only change the sequence of phrases within each |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2109 group (see the variable @code{reftex-index-phrases-sort-in-blocks}).@refill |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2110 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2111 @kindex C-c C-i |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2112 A useful command is @kbd{C-c C-i} (@code{reftex-index-phrases-info}) |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2113 which lists information about the phrase at point, including an example |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2114 of how the index entry will look like and the number of expected matches |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2115 in the document.@refill |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2116 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2117 @kindex C-c C-t |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2118 Another important check is to find out if there are double or |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2119 overlapping entries in the buffer. For example if you are first |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2120 searching and indexing @samp{Mars} and then @samp{Planet Mars}, the |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2121 second phrase will not match because of the index macro inserted before |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2122 @samp{Mars} earlier. The command @kbd{C-c C-t} |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2123 (@code{reftex-index-find-next-conflict-phrase}) finds the next phrase in |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2124 the buffer which is either duplicate or a subphrase of another phrase. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2125 In order to check the whole buffer like this, start at the beginning and |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2126 execute this command repeatedly.@refill |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2127 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2128 @node Global Indexing, , Consistency Checks, The Index Phrases File |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2129 @subsection Global Indexing |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2130 @cindex Global indexing |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2131 @cindex Indexing, global |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2132 @cindex Indexing, from @file{phrases} buffer |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2133 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2134 Once the index phrases have been collected and organized, you are set |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2135 for global indexing. I recommend to do this only on an otherwise |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2136 finished document. Global indexing starts from the phrases buffer. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2137 There are several commands which start indexing: @kbd{C-c C-x} acts on |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2138 the current phrase line, @kbd{C-c C-r} on all lines in the current |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2139 region and @kbd{C-c C-a} on all phrase lines in the buffer. It is |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2140 probably good to do indexing in small chunks since your concentration |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2141 may not last long enough to do everything in one go.@refill |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2142 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2143 @b{Ref@TeX{}} will start at the first phrase line and search the phrase |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2144 globally in the whole document. At each match it will stop, compute the |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2145 replacement string and offer you the following choices@footnote{Windows |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2146 users: Restrict yourself to the described keys during indexing. Pressing |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2147 @key{Help} at the indexing prompt can apparently hang Emacs.}:@refill |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2148 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2149 @table @kbd |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2150 @item y |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2151 Replace this match with the proposed string. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2152 @item n |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2153 Skip this match. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2154 @item ! |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2155 Replace this and all further matches in this file. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2156 @item q |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2157 Skip this match, start with next file. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2158 @item Q |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2159 Skip this match, start with next phrase. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2160 @item o |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2161 Select a different indexing macro for this match. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2162 @item 1-9 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2163 Select one of multiple index keys (those separated with @samp{||}). |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2164 @item e |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2165 Edit the replacement text. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2166 @item C-r |
40705 | 2167 Recursive edit. Use @kbd{C-M-c} to return to the indexing process. |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2168 @item s |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2169 Save this buffer and ask again about the current match. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2170 @item S |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2171 Save all document buffers and ask again about the current match. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2172 @item C-g |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2173 Abort the indexing process. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2174 @end table |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2175 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2176 The @samp{Find and Index in Document} menu in the phrases buffer also |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2177 lists a few options for the indexing process. The options have |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2178 associated customization variables to set the defaults (@pxref{Options |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2179 (Index Support)}). Here is a short explanation of what the options do: |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2180 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2181 @table @i |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2182 @item Match Whole Words |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2183 When searching for index phrases, make sure whole words are matched. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2184 This should probably always be on. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2185 @item Case Sensitive Search |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2186 Search case sensitively for phrases. I recommend to have this setting |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2187 off, in order to match the capitalized words at the beginning of a |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2188 sentence, and even typos. You can always say @emph{no} at a match you |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2189 do not like. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2190 @item Wrap Long Lines |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2191 Inserting index macros increases the line length. Turn this option on |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2192 to allow @b{Ref@TeX{}} to wrap long lines. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2193 @item Skip Indexed Matches |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2194 When this is on, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will at each match try to figure out if |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2195 this match is already indexed. A match is considered indexed if it is |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2196 either the argument of an index macro, or if an index macro is directly |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2197 (without whitespace separation) before or after the match. Index macros |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2198 are those configured in @code{reftex-index-macros}. Intended for |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2199 re-indexing a documents after changes have been made.@refill |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2200 @end table |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2201 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2202 Even though indexing should be the last thing you do to a document, you |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2203 are bound to make changes afterwards. Indexing then has to be applied |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2204 to the changed regions. The command |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2205 @code{reftex-index-phrases-apply-to-region} is designed for this |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2206 purpose. When called from a LaTeX document with active region, it will |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2207 apply @code{reftex-index-all-phrases} to the current region.@refill |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2208 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2209 @node Displaying and Editing the Index, Builtin Index Macros, The Index Phrases File, Index Support |
25829 | 2210 @section Displaying and Editing the Index |
2211 @cindex Displaying the Index | |
2212 @cindex Editing the Index | |
2213 @cindex Index entries, creating | |
2214 @cindex Index, displaying | |
2215 @cindex Index, editing | |
2216 @kindex C-c > | |
2217 @findex reftex-display-index | |
2218 | |
2219 In order to compile and display the index, press @kbd{C-c >}. If the | |
2220 document uses multiple indices, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will ask you to select | |
2221 one. Then, all index entries will be sorted alphabetically and | |
2222 displayed in a special buffer, the @file{*Index*} buffer. From that | |
2223 buffer you can check and edit each entry.@refill | |
2224 | |
2225 The index can be restricted to the current section or the region. Then | |
2226 only entries in that part of the document will go into the compiled | |
2227 index. To restrict to the current section, use a numeric prefix | |
2228 @samp{2}, thus press @kbd{C-u 2 C-c >}. To restrict to the current | |
2229 region, make the region active and use a numeric prefix @samp{3} (press | |
2230 @kbd{C-u 3 C-c >}). From within the @file{*Index*} buffer the | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2231 restriction can be moved from one section to the next by pressing the |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2232 @kbd{<} and @kbd{>} keys.@refill |
25829 | 2233 |
2234 One caveat: @b{Ref@TeX{}} finds the definition point of an index entry | |
2235 by searching near the buffer position where it had found to macro during | |
2236 scanning. If you have several identical index entries in the same | |
2237 buffer and significant changes have shifted the entries around, you must | |
2238 rescan the buffer to ensure the correspondence between the | |
2239 @file{*Index*} buffer and the definition locations. It is therefore | |
2240 advisable to rescan the document (with @kbd{r} or @kbd{C-u r}) | |
2241 frequently while editing the index from the @file{*Index*} | |
2242 buffer.@refill | |
2243 | |
2244 @kindex ? | |
2245 Here is a list of special commands available in the @file{*Index*} buffer. A | |
2246 summary of this information is always available by pressing | |
2247 @kbd{?}.@refill | |
2248 | |
2249 @table @kbd | |
2250 @tablesubheading{General} | |
2251 @item ? | |
2252 Display a summary of commands. | |
2253 | |
2254 @item 0-9, - | |
2255 Prefix argument. | |
2256 | |
2257 @tablesubheading{Moving around} | |
2258 @item ! A..Z | |
2259 Pressing any capital letter will jump to the corresponding section in | |
2260 the @file{*Index*} buffer. The exclamation mark is special and jumps to | |
2261 the first entries alphabetically sorted below @samp{A}. These are | |
2262 usually non-alphanumeric characters.@refill | |
2263 @item n | |
2264 Go to next entry.@refill | |
2265 @item p | |
2266 Go to previous entry.@refill | |
2267 | |
2268 @tablesubheading{Access to document locations} | |
2269 @item @key{SPC} | |
2270 Show the place in the document where this index entry is defined.@refill | |
2271 | |
2272 @item @key{TAB} | |
2273 Go to the definition of the current index entry in another | |
2274 window.@refill | |
2275 | |
2276 @item @key{RET} | |
2277 Go to the definition of the current index entry and hide the | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2278 @file{*Index*} buffer window.@refill |
25829 | 2279 |
2280 @item f | |
2281 @vindex reftex-index-follow-mode | |
2282 @vindex reftex-revisit-to-follow | |
2283 Toggle follow mode. When follow mode is active, the other window will | |
2284 always show the location corresponding to the line in the @file{*Index*} | |
2285 buffer at point. This is similar to pressing @key{SPC} after each | |
2286 cursor motion. The default for this flag can be set with the variable | |
2287 @code{reftex-index-follow-mode}. Note that only context in files | |
2288 already visited is shown. @b{Ref@TeX{}} will not visit a file just for | |
2289 follow mode. See, however, the variable | |
2290 @code{reftex-revisit-to-follow}.@refill | |
2291 | |
2292 @tablesubheading{Entry editing} | |
2293 @item e | |
2294 Edit the current index entry. In the minibuffer, you can edit the | |
2295 index macro which defines this entry.@refill | |
2296 | |
2297 @item C-k | |
2298 Kill the index entry. Currently not implemented because I don't know | |
2299 how to implement an @code{undo} function for this.@refill | |
2300 | |
2301 @item * | |
2302 Edit the @var{key} part of the entry. This is the initial part of the | |
2303 entry which determines the location of the entry in the index.@refill | |
2304 | |
2305 @item | | |
2306 Edit the @var{attribute} part of the entry. This is the part after the | |
2307 vertical bar. With @code{MakeIndex}, this part is an encapsulating | |
2308 macro. With @code{xindy}, it is called @emph{attribute} and is a | |
2309 property of the index entry that can lead to special formatting. When | |
2310 called with @kbd{C-u} prefix, kill the entire @var{attribute} | |
2311 part.@refill | |
2312 | |
2313 @item @@ | |
2314 Edit the @var{visual} part of the entry. This is the part after the | |
2315 @samp{@@} which is used by @code{MakeIndex} to change the visual | |
2316 appearance of the entry in the index. When called with @kbd{C-u} | |
2317 prefix, kill the entire @var{visual} part.@refill | |
2318 | |
2319 @item ( | |
2320 Toggle the beginning of page range property @samp{|(} of the | |
2321 entry.@refill | |
2322 | |
2323 @item ) | |
2324 Toggle the end of page range property @samp{|)} of the entry.@refill | |
2325 | |
2326 @item _ | |
2327 Make the current entry a subentry. This command will prompt for the | |
2328 superordinate entry and insert it.@refill | |
2329 | |
2330 @item ^ | |
2331 Remove the highest superordinate entry. If the current entry is a | |
2332 subitem (@samp{aaa!bbb!ccc}), this function moves it up the hierarchy | |
2333 (@samp{bbb!ccc}).@refill | |
2334 | |
2335 @tablesubheading{Exiting} | |
2336 @item q | |
2337 Hide the @file{*Index*} buffer.@refill | |
2338 | |
2339 @item k | |
2340 Kill the @file{*Index*} buffer.@refill | |
2341 | |
2342 @item C-c = | |
2343 Switch to the Table of Contents buffer of this document.@refill | |
2344 | |
2345 @tablesubheading{Controlling what gets displayed} | |
2346 @item c | |
2347 @vindex reftex-index-include-context | |
2348 Toggle the display of short context in the @file{*Index*} buffer. The | |
2349 default for this flag can be set with the variable | |
2350 @code{reftex-index-include-context}.@refill | |
2351 | |
2352 @item @} | |
2353 Restrict the index to a single document section. The corresponding | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2354 section number will be displayed in the @code{R<>} indicator in the |
25829 | 2355 mode line and in the header of the @file{*Index*} buffer.@refill |
2356 | |
2357 @item @{ | |
2358 Widen the index to contain all entries of the document.@refill | |
2359 | |
2360 @item < | |
2361 When the index is currently restricted, move the restriction to the | |
2362 previous section.@refill | |
2363 | |
2364 @item > | |
2365 When the index is currently restricted, move the restriction to the | |
2366 next section.@refill | |
2367 | |
2368 @tablesubheading{Updating the buffer} | |
2369 @item g | |
2370 Rebuild the @file{*Index*} buffer. This does @emph{not} rescan the | |
2371 document. However, it sorts the entries again, so that edited entries | |
2372 will move to the correct position.@refill | |
2373 | |
2374 @item r | |
2375 @vindex reftex-enable-partial-scans | |
2376 Reparse the LaTeX document and rebuild the @file{*Index*} buffer. When | |
2377 @code{reftex-enable-partial-scans} is non-nil, rescan only the file this | |
2378 location is defined in, not the entire document.@refill | |
2379 | |
2380 @item C-u r | |
2381 Reparse the @emph{entire} LaTeX document and rebuild the @file{*Index*} | |
2382 buffer.@refill | |
2383 | |
2384 @item s | |
2385 Switch to a different index (for documents with multiple | |
2386 indices).@refill | |
2387 @end table | |
2388 | |
2389 | |
2390 @node Builtin Index Macros, Defining Index Macros, Displaying and Editing the Index, Index Support | |
2391 @section Builtin Index Macros | |
2392 @cindex Builtin index macros | |
2393 @cindex Index macros, builtin | |
2394 @vindex reftex-index-macros | |
2395 @cindex @code{multind}, LaTeX package | |
2396 @cindex @code{index}, LaTeX package | |
2397 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{multind} | |
2398 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{index} | |
2399 | |
2400 @b{Ref@TeX{}} by default recognizes the @code{\index} and | |
2401 @code{\glossary} macros which are defined in the LaTeX core. It has | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2402 also builtin support for the re-implementations of @code{\index} |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2403 in the @file{multind} and @file{index} packages. However, since |
25829 | 2404 the different definitions of the @code{\index} macro are incompatible, |
2405 you will have to explicitly specify the index style used. | |
2406 @xref{Creating Index Entries}, for information on how to do that. | |
2407 | |
2408 @node Defining Index Macros, , Builtin Index Macros, Index Support | |
2409 @section Defining Index Macros | |
2410 @cindex Defining Index Macros | |
2411 @cindex Index macros, defining | |
2412 @vindex reftex-index-macros | |
2413 | |
2414 When writing a document with an index you will probably define | |
2415 additional macros which make entries into the index. | |
2416 Let's look at an example. | |
2417 | |
2418 @example | |
2419 \newcommand@{\ix@}[1]@{#1\index@{#1@}@} | |
2420 \newcommand@{\nindex@}[1]@{\textit@{#1@}\index[name]@{#1@}@} | |
2421 \newcommand@{\astobj@}[1]@{\index@{Astronomical Objects!#1@}@} | |
2422 @end example | |
2423 | |
2424 The first macro @code{\ix} typesets its argument in the text and places | |
2425 it into the index. The second macro @code{\nindex} typesets its | |
2426 argument in the text and places it into a separate index with the tag | |
2427 @samp{name}@footnote{We are using the syntax of the @file{index} package | |
2428 here.}. The last macro also places its argument into the index, but as | |
2429 subitems under the main index entry @samp{Astronomical Objects}. Here | |
2430 is how to make @b{Ref@TeX{}} recognize and correctly interpret these | |
2431 macros, first with Emacs Lisp. | |
2432 | |
2433 @lisp | |
2434 (setq reftex-index-macros | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2435 '(("\\ix@{*@}" "idx" ?x "" nil nil) |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2436 ("\\nindex@{*@}" "name" ?n "" nil nil) |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2437 ("\\astobj@{*@}" "idx" ?o "Astronomical Objects!" nil t))) |
25829 | 2438 @end lisp |
2439 | |
2440 Note that the index tag is @samp{idx} for the main index, and | |
2441 @samp{name} for the name index. @samp{idx} and @samp{glo} are reserved | |
2442 for the default index and for the glossary. | |
2443 | |
2444 The character arguments @code{?x}, @code{?n}, and @code{?o} are for | |
2445 quick identification of these macros when @b{Ref@TeX{}} inserts new | |
2446 index entries with @code{reftex-index}. These codes need to be | |
2447 unique. @code{?i}, @code{?I}, and @code{?g} are reserved for the | |
2448 @code{\index}, @code{\index*}, and @code{\glossary} macros, | |
2449 respectively. | |
2450 | |
2451 The following string is empty unless your macro adds a superordinate | |
2452 entry to the index key - this is the case for the @code{\astobj} macro. | |
2453 | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2454 The next entry can be a hook function to exclude certain matches, it |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2455 almost always can be @code{nil}. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2456 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2457 The final element in the list indicates if the text being indexed needs |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2458 to be repeated outside the macro. For the normal index macros, this |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2459 should be @code{t}. Only if the macro typesets the entry in the text |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2460 (like @code{\ix} and @code{\nindex} in the example do), this should be |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2461 @code{nil}. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2462 |
25829 | 2463 To do the same thing with customize, you need to fill in the templates |
2464 like this: | |
2465 | |
2466 @example | |
2467 Repeat: | |
2468 [INS] [DEL] List: | |
2469 Macro with args: \ix@{*@} | |
2470 Index Tag : [Value Menu] String: idx | |
2471 Access Key : x | |
2472 Key Prefix : | |
2473 Exclusion hook : nil | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2474 Repeat Outside : [Toggle] off (nil) |
25829 | 2475 [INS] [DEL] List: |
2476 Macro with args: \nindex@{*@} | |
2477 Index Tag : [Value Menu] String: name | |
2478 Access Key : n | |
2479 Key Prefix : | |
2480 Exclusion hook : nil | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2481 Repeat Outside : [Toggle] off (nil) |
25829 | 2482 [INS] [DEL] List: |
2483 Macro with args: \astobj@{*@} | |
2484 Index Tag : [Value Menu] String: idx | |
2485 Access Key : o | |
2486 Key Prefix : Astronomical Objects! | |
2487 Exclusion hook : nil | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2488 Repeat Outside : [Toggle] on (non-nil) |
25829 | 2489 [INS] |
2490 @end example | |
2491 | |
2492 With the macro @code{\ix} defined, you may want to change the default | |
2493 macro used for indexing a text phrase (@pxref{Creating Index Entries}). | |
2494 This would be done like this | |
2495 | |
2496 @lisp | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2497 (setq reftex-index-default-macro '(?x "idx")) |
25829 | 2498 @end lisp |
2499 | |
2500 which specifies that the macro identified with the character @code{?x} (the | |
2501 @code{\ix} macro) should be used for indexing phrases and words already | |
2502 in the buffer with @kbd{C-c /} (@code{reftex-index-selection-or-word}). | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2503 The index tag is "idx".@refill |
25829 | 2504 |
2505 @node Viewing Cross-References, RefTeXs Menu, Index Support, Top | |
2506 @chapter Viewing Cross--References | |
2507 @findex reftex-view-crossref | |
2508 @findex reftex-mouse-view-crossref | |
2509 @kindex C-c & | |
37999
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
2510 @kindex S-mouse-2 |
25829 | 2511 |
2512 @b{Ref@TeX{}} can display cross--referencing information. This means, | |
2513 if two document locations are linked, @b{Ref@TeX{}} can display the | |
2514 matching location(s) in another window. The @code{\label} and @code{\ref} | |
2515 macros are one way of establishing such a link. Also, a @code{\cite} | |
2516 macro is linked to the corresponding @code{\bibitem} macro or a BibTeX | |
2517 database entry.@refill | |
2518 | |
2519 The feature is invoked by pressing @kbd{C-c &} | |
2520 (@code{reftex-view-crossref}) while point is on the @var{key} argument | |
2521 of a macro involved in cross--referencing. You can also click with | |
37999
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
2522 @kbd{S-mouse-2} on the macro argument. Here is what will happen for |
25829 | 2523 individual classes of macros:@refill |
2524 | |
2525 @table @asis | |
2526 | |
2527 @item @code{\ref} | |
2528 @cindex @code{\ref} | |
2529 Display the corresponding label definition. All usual | |
2530 variants@footnote{all macros that start with @samp{ref} or end with | |
2531 @samp{ref} or @samp{refrange}} of the @code{\ref} macro are active for | |
2532 cross--reference display. This works also for labels defined in an | |
2533 external document when the current document refers to them through the | |
2534 @code{xr} interface (@pxref{xr (LaTeX package)}).@refill | |
2535 | |
2536 @item @code{\label} | |
2537 @cindex @code{\label} | |
2538 @vindex reftex-label-alist | |
2539 Display a document location which references this label. Pressing | |
2540 @kbd{C-c &} several times moves through the entire document and finds | |
2541 all locations. Not only the @code{\label} macro but also other macros | |
2542 with label arguments (as configured with @code{reftex-label-alist}) are | |
2543 active for cross--reference display.@refill | |
2544 | |
2545 @item @code{\cite} | |
2546 @cindex @code{\cite} | |
2547 Display the corresponding BibTeX database entry or @code{\bibitem}. | |
2548 All usual variants@footnote{all macros that either start or end with | |
2549 @samp{cite}} of the @code{\cite} macro are active for cross--reference | |
2550 display.@refill | |
2551 | |
2552 @item @code{\bibitem} | |
2553 @cindex @code{\bibitem} | |
2554 Display a document location which cites this article. Pressing | |
2555 @kbd{C-c &} several times moves through the entire document and finds | |
2556 all locations.@refill | |
2557 | |
2558 @item BibTeX | |
2559 @cindex BibTeX buffer, viewing cite locations from | |
2560 @cindex Viewing cite locations from BibTeX buffer | |
2561 @kbd{C-c &} is also active in BibTeX buffers. All locations in a | |
2562 document where the database entry at point is cited will be displayed. | |
2563 On first use, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will prompt for a buffer which belongs to | |
2564 the document you want to search. Subsequent calls will use the same | |
2565 document, until you break this link with a prefix argument to @kbd{C-c | |
2566 &}.@refill | |
2567 | |
2568 @item @code{\index} | |
2569 @cindex @code{\index} | |
2570 Display other locations in the document which are marked by an index | |
2571 macro with the same key argument. Along with the standard @code{\index} | |
2572 and @code{\glossary} macros, all macros configured in | |
2573 @code{reftex-index-macros} will be recognized.@refill | |
2574 @end table | |
2575 | |
37999
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
2576 @vindex reftex-view-crossref-extra |
25829 | 2577 While the display of cross referencing information for the above |
2578 mentioned macros is hard--coded, you can configure additional relations | |
37999
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
2579 in the variable @code{reftex-view-crossref-extra}. |
25829 | 2580 |
2581 @iftex | |
2582 @chapter All the Rest | |
2583 @end iftex | |
2584 | |
39267 | 2585 @node RefTeXs Menu, Key Bindings, Viewing Cross-References, Top |
25829 | 2586 @section @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s Menu |
2587 @cindex RefTeXs Menu | |
2588 @cindex Menu, in the menu bar | |
2589 | |
2590 @b{Ref@TeX{}} installs a @code{Ref} menu in the menu bar on systems | |
2591 which support this. From this menu you can access all of | |
2592 @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s commands and a few of its options. There is also a | |
2593 @code{Customize} submenu which can be used to access @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s | |
2594 entire set of options.@refill | |
2595 | |
39267 | 2596 @node Key Bindings, Faces, RefTeXs Menu, Top |
2597 @section Default Key Bindings | |
2598 @cindex Key Bindings, summary | |
2599 | |
2600 Here is a summary of the available key bindings. | |
25829 | 2601 |
2602 @kindex C-c = | |
47050
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
2603 @kindex C-c - |
25829 | 2604 @kindex C-c ( |
2605 @kindex C-c ) | |
2606 @kindex C-c [ | |
2607 @kindex C-c & | |
37999
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
2608 @kindex S-mouse-2 |
25829 | 2609 @kindex C-c / |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2610 @kindex C-c \ |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2611 @kindex C-c | |
25829 | 2612 @kindex C-c < |
2613 @kindex C-c > | |
2614 @example | |
2615 @kbd{C-c =} @code{reftex-toc} | |
47050
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
2616 @kbd{C-c -} @code{reftex-toc-recenter} |
25829 | 2617 @kbd{C-c (} @code{reftex-label} |
2618 @kbd{C-c )} @code{reftex-reference} | |
2619 @kbd{C-c [} @code{reftex-citation} | |
2620 @kbd{C-c &} @code{reftex-view-crossref} | |
37999
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
2621 @kbd{S-mouse-2} @code{reftex-mouse-view-crossref} |
25829 | 2622 @kbd{C-c /} @code{reftex-index-selection-or-word} |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2623 @kbd{C-c \} @code{reftex-index-phrase-selection-or-word} |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2624 @kbd{C-c |} @code{reftex-index-visit-phrases-buffer} |
25829 | 2625 @kbd{C-c <} @code{reftex-index} |
2626 @kbd{C-c >} @code{reftex-display-index} | |
2627 @end example | |
2628 | |
37999
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
2629 Note that the @kbd{S-mouse-2} binding is only provided if this key is |
25829 | 2630 not already used by some other package. @b{Ref@TeX{}} will not override an |
37999
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
2631 existing binding to @kbd{S-mouse-2}.@refill |
25829 | 2632 |
2633 Personally, I also bind some functions in the users @kbd{C-c} map for | |
2634 easier access.@refill | |
2635 | |
2636 @c FIXME: Do we need bindings for the Index macros here as well? | |
2637 @c C-c i C-c I or so???? | |
39267 | 2638 @c How about key bindings for reftex-reset-mode and reftex-parse-document? |
25829 | 2639 @kindex C-c t |
2640 @kindex C-c l | |
2641 @kindex C-c r | |
2642 @kindex C-c c | |
2643 @kindex C-c v | |
2644 @kindex C-c s | |
2645 @kindex C-c g | |
2646 @example | |
2647 @kbd{C-c t} @code{reftex-toc} | |
2648 @kbd{C-c l} @code{reftex-label} | |
2649 @kbd{C-c r} @code{reftex-reference} | |
2650 @kbd{C-c c} @code{reftex-citation} | |
2651 @kbd{C-c v} @code{reftex-view-crossref} | |
2652 @kbd{C-c s} @code{reftex-search-document} | |
2653 @kbd{C-c g} @code{reftex-grep-document} | |
2654 @end example | |
2655 | |
2656 @noindent These keys are reserved for the user, so I cannot bind them by | |
39267 | 2657 default. If you want to have these key bindings available, set in your |
25829 | 2658 @file{.emacs} file: |
2659 | |
2660 @vindex reftex-extra-bindings | |
2661 @lisp | |
2662 (setq reftex-extra-bindings t) | |
2663 @end lisp | |
2664 | |
2665 @vindex reftex-load-hook | |
39267 | 2666 Changing and adding to @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s key bindings is best done in the hook |
25829 | 2667 @code{reftex-load-hook}. For information on the keymaps |
2668 which should be used to add keys, see @ref{Keymaps and Hooks}. | |
2669 | |
39267 | 2670 @node Faces, AUCTeX, Key Bindings, Top |
25829 | 2671 @section Faces |
2672 @cindex Faces | |
2673 | |
2674 @b{Ref@TeX{}} uses faces when available to structure the selection and | |
2675 table of contents buffers. It does not create its own faces, but uses | |
2676 the ones defined in @file{font-lock.el}. Therefore, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will | |
2677 use faces only when @code{font-lock} is loaded. This seems to be | |
2678 reasonable because people who like faces will very likely have it | |
2679 loaded. If you wish to turn off fontification or change the involved | |
2680 faces, see @ref{Options (Fontification)}.@refill | |
2681 | |
2682 @node Multifile Documents, Language Support, AUCTeX, Top | |
2683 @section Multifile Documents | |
2684 @cindex Multifile documents | |
2685 @cindex Documents, spread over files | |
2686 | |
2687 The following is relevant when working with documents spread over many | |
2688 files:@refill | |
2689 | |
2690 @itemize @bullet | |
2691 @item | |
2692 @b{Ref@TeX{}} has full support for multifile documents. You can edit parts of | |
2693 several (multifile) documents at the same time without conflicts. | |
2694 @b{Ref@TeX{}} provides functions to run @code{grep}, @code{search} and | |
2695 @code{query-replace} on all files which are part of a multifile | |
2696 document.@refill | |
2697 | |
2698 @item | |
2699 @vindex tex-main-file | |
2700 @vindex TeX-master | |
29772
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2701 All files belonging to a multifile document should define a File |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2702 Variable (@code{TeX-master} for AUCTeX or @code{tex-main-file} for the |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2703 standard Emacs LaTeX mode) containing the name of the master file. For |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2704 example, to set the file variable @code{TeX-master}, include something |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2705 like the following at the end of each TeX file:@refill |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2706 |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2707 @example |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2708 %%% Local Variables: *** |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2709 %%% mode:latex *** |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2710 %%% TeX-master: "thesis.tex" *** |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2711 %%% End: *** |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2712 @end example |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2713 |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2714 AUCTeX with the setting |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2715 |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2716 @lisp |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2717 (setq-default TeX-master nil) |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2718 @end lisp |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2719 |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2720 will actually ask you for each new file about the master file and insert |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2721 this comment automatically. For more details see the documentation of |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2722 the AUCTeX (@pxref{Multifile,,,auctex, The AUC TeX User Manual}), the |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2723 documentation about the Emacs (La)TeX mode (@pxref{TeX Print,,,emacs, |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2724 The GNU Emacs Manual}) and the Emacs documentation on File Variables |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2725 (@pxref{File Variables,,,emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}).@refill |
25829 | 2726 |
2727 @item | |
2728 The context of a label definition must be found in the same file as the | |
2729 label itself in order to be processed correctly by @b{Ref@TeX{}}. The only | |
2730 exception is that section labels referring to a section statement | |
2731 outside the current file can still use that section title as | |
2732 context.@refill | |
2733 @end itemize | |
2734 | |
2735 @node Language Support, Finding Files, Multifile Documents, Top | |
2736 @section Language Support | |
2737 @cindex Language support | |
2738 | |
2739 Some parts of @b{Ref@TeX{}} are language dependent. The default | |
2740 settings work well for English. If you are writing in a different | |
2741 language, the following hints may be useful: | |
2742 | |
2743 @itemize @bullet | |
2744 @item | |
2745 @vindex reftex-derive-label-parameters | |
2746 @vindex reftex-abbrev-parameters | |
2747 The mechanism to derive a label from context includes the abbreviation | |
2748 of words and omission of unimportant words. These mechanisms may have | |
2749 to be changed for other languages. See the variables | |
2750 @code{reftex-derive-label-parameters} and @code{reftex-abbrev-parameters}. | |
2751 | |
2752 @item | |
2753 @vindex reftex-translate-to-ascii-function | |
2754 @vindex reftex-label-illegal-re | |
2755 Also, when a label is derived from context, @b{Ref@TeX{}} clears the | |
2756 context string from non-ASCII characters in order to make a legal label. | |
2757 If there should ever be a version of @TeX{} which allows extended | |
2758 characters @emph{in labels}, then we will have to look at the | |
2759 variables @code{reftex-translate-to-ascii-function} and | |
2760 @code{reftex-label-illegal-re}. | |
2761 | |
2762 @item | |
2763 When a label is referenced, @b{Ref@TeX{}} looks at the word before point | |
2764 to guess which label type is required. These @emph{magic words} are | |
2765 different in every language. For an example of how to add magic words, | |
2766 see @ref{Adding Magic Words}. | |
2767 | |
2768 @vindex reftex-multiref-punctuation | |
2769 @vindex reftex-cite-punctuation | |
2770 @item | |
2771 @b{Ref@TeX{}} inserts ``punctuation'' for multiple references and | |
2772 for the author list in citations. Some of this may be language | |
2773 dependent. See the variables @code{reftex-multiref-punctuation} and | |
2774 @code{reftex-cite-punctuation}. | |
2775 @end itemize | |
2776 | |
2777 @node Finding Files, Optimizations, Language Support, Top | |
2778 @section Finding Files | |
2779 @cindex Finding files | |
2780 | |
2781 In order to find files included in a document via @code{\input} or | |
2782 @code{\include}, @b{Ref@TeX{}} searches all directories specified in the | |
2783 environment variable @code{TEXINPUTS}. Similarly, it will search the | |
2784 path specified in the variables @code{BIBINPUTS} and @code{TEXBIB} for | |
2785 BibTeX database files. | |
2786 | |
2787 When searching, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will also expand recursive path | |
2788 definitions (directories ending in @samp{//} or @samp{!!}). But it will | |
2789 only search and expand directories @emph{explicitly} given in these | |
2790 variables. This may cause problems under the following circumstances: | |
2791 | |
2792 @itemize @bullet | |
2793 @item | |
2794 Most TeX system have a default search path for both TeX files and BibTeX | |
2795 files which is defined in some setup file. Usually this default path is | |
2796 for system files which @b{Ref@TeX{}} does not need to see. But if your | |
2797 document needs TeX files or BibTeX database files in a directory only | |
2798 given in the default search path, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will fail to find them. | |
2799 @item | |
2800 Some TeX systems do not use environment variables at all in order to | |
2801 specify the search path. Both default and user search path are then | |
2802 defined in setup files. | |
2803 @end itemize | |
2804 | |
2805 @noindent | |
2806 There are three ways to solve this problem: | |
2807 | |
2808 @itemize @bullet | |
2809 @item | |
2810 Specify all relevant directories explicitly in the environment | |
2811 variables. If for some reason you don't want to mess with the default | |
2812 variables @code{TEXINPUTS} and @code{BIBINPUTS}, define your own | |
2813 variables and configure @b{Ref@TeX{}} to use them instead: | |
2814 | |
2815 @lisp | |
2816 (setq reftex-texpath-environment-variables '("MYTEXINPUTS")) | |
2817 (setq reftex-bibpath-environment-variables '("MYBIBINPUTS")) | |
2818 @end lisp | |
2819 | |
2820 @item | |
2821 Specify the full search path directly in @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s variables. | |
2822 | |
2823 @lisp | |
2824 (setq reftex-texpath-environment-variables | |
2825 '("./inp:/home/cd/tex//:/usr/local/tex//")) | |
2826 (setq reftex-bibpath-environment-variables | |
2827 '("/home/cd/tex/lit/")) | |
2828 @end lisp | |
2829 | |
2830 @item | |
2831 Some TeX systems provide stand--alone programs to do the file search just | |
2832 like TeX and BibTeX. E.g. Thomas Esser's @code{teTeX} uses the | |
2833 @code{kpathsearch} library which provides the command @code{kpsewhich} | |
2834 to search for files. @b{Ref@TeX{}} can be configured to use this | |
2835 program. Note that the exact syntax of the @code{kpsewhich} | |
2836 command depends upon the version of that program. | |
2837 | |
2838 @lisp | |
2839 (setq reftex-use-external-file-finders t) | |
2840 (setq reftex-external-file-finders | |
37038
528310f62c34
(Finding Files): Fix an example.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
36509
diff
changeset
|
2841 '(("tex" . "kpsewhich -format=.tex %f") |
528310f62c34
(Finding Files): Fix an example.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
36509
diff
changeset
|
2842 ("bib" . "kpsewhich -format=.bib %f"))) |
25829 | 2843 @end lisp |
2844 @end itemize | |
2845 | |
46684
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
2846 @cindex Noweb files |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
2847 @vindex reftex-file-extensions |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
2848 @vindex TeX-file-extensions |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
2849 Some people like to use RefTeX with noweb files, which usually have the |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
2850 extension @file{.nw}. In order to deal with such files, the new |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
2851 extension must be added to the list of valid extensions in the variable |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
2852 @code{reftex-file-extensions}. When working with AUCTeX as major mode, |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
2853 the new extension must also be known to AUCTeX via the variable |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
2854 @code{TeX-file-extension}. For example: |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
2855 |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
2856 @lisp |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
2857 (setq reftex-file-extensions |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
2858 '(("nw" "tex" ".tex" ".ltx") ("bib" ".bib"))) |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
2859 (setq TeX-file-extensions |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
2860 '( "nw" "tex" "sty" "cls" "ltx" "texi" "texinfo")) |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
2861 @end lisp |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
2862 |
25829 | 2863 @node Optimizations, Problems and Work-Arounds, Finding Files, Top |
2864 @section Optimizations | |
2865 @cindex Optimizations | |
2866 | |
47050
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
2867 @b{Note added 2002. Computers have gotten a lot faster, so most of the |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
2868 optimizations discussed below will not be necessary on new machines. I |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
2869 am leaving this stuff in the manual for people who want to write thick |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
2870 books, where some of it still might be useful.} |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
2871 |
25829 | 2872 Implementing the principle of least surprises, the default settings of |
2873 @b{Ref@TeX{}} ensure a safe ride for beginners and casual users. However, | |
2874 when using @b{Ref@TeX{}} for a large project and/or on a small computer, | |
2875 there are ways to improve speed or memory usage.@refill | |
2876 | |
2877 @itemize @bullet | |
2878 @item | |
2879 @b{Removing Lookup Buffers}@* | |
2880 @cindex Removing lookup buffers | |
2881 @b{Ref@TeX{}} will load other parts of a multifile document as well as BibTeX | |
2882 database files for lookup purposes. These buffers are kept, so that | |
2883 subsequent use of the same files is fast. If you can't afford keeping | |
2884 these buffers around, and if you can live with a speed penalty, try | |
2885 | |
2886 @vindex reftex-keep-temporary-buffers | |
2887 @lisp | |
2888 (setq reftex-keep-temporary-buffers nil) | |
2889 @end lisp | |
2890 | |
2891 @item | |
2892 @b{Partial Document Scans}@* | |
2893 @cindex Partial documents scans | |
2894 @cindex Document scanning, partial | |
2895 A @kbd{C-u} prefix on the major @b{Ref@TeX{}} commands @code{reftex-label} | |
2896 (@kbd{C-u C-c (}), @code{reftex-reference} (@kbd{C-u C-c )}), | |
2897 @code{reftex-citation} (@kbd{C-u C-c [}), @code{reftex-toc} (@kbd{C-u C-c | |
2898 =}), and @code{reftex-view-crossref} (@kbd{C-u C-c &}) initiates | |
2899 re-parsing of the entire document in order to update the parsing | |
2900 information. For a large document this can be unnecessary, in | |
2901 particular if only one file has changed. @b{Ref@TeX{}} can be configured | |
2902 to do partial scans instead of full ones. @kbd{C-u} re-parsing then | |
2903 does apply only to the current buffer and files included from it. | |
2904 Likewise, the @kbd{r} key in both the label selection buffer and the | |
2905 table-of-contents buffer will only prompt scanning of the file in which | |
2906 the label or section macro near the cursor was defined. Re-parsing of | |
2907 the entire document is still available by using @kbd{C-u C-u} as a | |
2908 prefix, or the capital @kbd{R} key in the menus. To use this feature, | |
2909 try@refill | |
2910 | |
2911 @vindex reftex-enable-partial-scans | |
2912 @lisp | |
2913 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t) | |
2914 @end lisp | |
2915 | |
2916 @item | |
2917 @b{Saving Parser Information}@* | |
2918 @cindex Saving parser information | |
2919 @cindex Parse information, saving to a file | |
27195 | 2920 @vindex reftex-parse-file-extension |
25829 | 2921 Even with partial scans enabled, @b{Ref@TeX{}} still has to make one full |
2922 scan, when you start working with a document. To avoid this, parsing | |
2923 information can be stored in a file. The file @file{MASTER.rel} is used | |
2924 for storing information about a document with master file | |
2925 @file{MASTER.tex}. It is written automatically when you kill a buffer | |
2926 in @code{reftex-mode} or when you exit Emacs. The information is | |
2927 restored when you begin working with a document in a new editing | |
2928 session. To use this feature, put into @file{.emacs}:@refill | |
2929 | |
2930 @vindex reftex-save-parse-info | |
2931 @lisp | |
2932 (setq reftex-save-parse-info t) | |
2933 @end lisp | |
2934 | |
2935 @item | |
2936 @b{Automatic Document Scans}@* | |
2937 @cindex Automatic document scans | |
2938 @cindex Document scanning, automatic | |
2939 At rare occasions, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will automatically rescan a part of the | |
2940 document. If this gets into your way, it can be turned off with | |
2941 | |
2942 @vindex reftex-allow-automatic-rescan | |
2943 @lisp | |
2944 (setq reftex-allow-automatic-rescan nil) | |
2945 @end lisp | |
2946 | |
2947 @b{Ref@TeX{}} will then occasionally annotate new labels in the selection | |
2948 buffer, saying that their position in the label list in uncertain. A | |
2949 manual document scan will fix this.@refill | |
2950 | |
2951 @item | |
2952 @b{Multiple Selection Buffers}@* | |
2953 @cindex Multiple selection buffers | |
2954 @cindex Selection buffers, multiple | |
2955 Normally, the selection buffer @file{*RefTeX Select*} is re-created for | |
2956 every selection process. In documents with very many labels this can | |
2957 take several seconds. @b{Ref@TeX{}} provides an option to create a | |
2958 separate selection buffer for each label type and to keep this buffer | |
2959 from one selection to the next. These buffers are updated automatically | |
2960 only when a new label has been added in the buffers category with | |
2961 @code{reftex-label}. Updating the buffer takes as long as recreating it | |
2962 - so the time saving is limited to cases where no new labels of that | |
2963 category have been added. To turn on this feature, use@refill | |
2964 | |
2965 @vindex reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers | |
2966 @lisp | |
2967 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t) | |
2968 @end lisp | |
2969 | |
2970 @noindent | |
2971 @cindex Selection buffers, updating | |
2972 You can also inhibit the automatic updating entirely. Then the | |
2973 selection buffer will always pop up very fast, but may not contain the | |
2974 most recently defined labels. You can always update the buffer by hand, | |
2975 with the @kbd{g} key. To get this behavior, use instead@refill | |
2976 | |
2977 @vindex reftex-auto-update-selection-buffers | |
2978 @lisp | |
2979 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t | |
2980 reftex-auto-update-selection-buffers nil) | |
2981 @end lisp | |
2982 @end itemize | |
2983 | |
2984 @need 2000 | |
2985 @noindent | |
2986 @b{As a summary}, here are the settings I recommend for heavy use of | |
2987 @b{Ref@TeX{}} with large documents: | |
2988 | |
2989 @lisp | |
2990 @group | |
2991 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t | |
2992 reftex-save-parse-info t | |
2993 reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t) | |
2994 @end group | |
2995 @end lisp | |
2996 | |
2997 @node AUCTeX, Multifile Documents, Faces, Top | |
2998 @section @w{AUC @TeX{}} | |
2999 @cindex @code{AUCTeX}, Emacs package | |
3000 @cindex Emacs packages, @code{AUCTeX} | |
3001 | |
3002 AUCTeX is without doubt the best major mode for editing TeX and LaTeX | |
29772
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
3003 files with Emacs (@pxref{Top,AUCTeX,,auctex, The AUCTeX User Manual}). |
46684
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3004 If AUCTeX is not part of your Emacs distribution, you can get |
29772
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
3005 it@footnote{XEmacs 21.x users may want to install the corresponding |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
3006 XEmacs package.} by ftp from the |
25829 | 3007 @uref{http://www.sunsite.auc.dk/auctex/,AUCTeX distribution site}. |
3008 | |
3009 @menu | |
3010 * AUCTeX-RefTeX Interface:: How both packages work together | |
3011 * Style Files:: AUCTeX's style files can support RefTeX | |
3012 * Bib-Cite:: Hypertext reading of a document | |
3013 @end menu | |
3014 | |
3015 @node AUCTeX-RefTeX Interface, Style Files, , AUCTeX | |
3016 @subsection The AUC@TeX{}-@b{Ref@TeX{}} Interface | |
3017 | |
3018 @b{Ref@TeX{}} contains code to interface with AUCTeX. When this | |
3019 interface is turned on, both packages will interact closely. Instead of | |
3020 using @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s commands directly, you can then also use them | |
3021 indirectly as part of the AUCTeX | |
3022 environment@footnote{@b{Ref@TeX{}} 4.0 and AUCTeX 9.10c will be | |
3023 needed for all of this to work. Parts of it work also with earlier | |
3024 versions.}. The interface is turned on with@refill | |
3025 | |
3026 @lisp | |
3027 (setq reftex-plug-into-AUCTeX t) | |
3028 @end lisp | |
3029 | |
3030 If you need finer control about which parts of the interface are used | |
3031 and which not, read the docstring of the variable | |
3032 @code{reftex-plug-into-AUCTeX} or customize it with @kbd{M-x | |
3033 customize-variable @key{RET} reftex-plug-into-AUCTeX @key{RET}}. | |
3034 | |
3035 The following list describes the individual parts of the interface. | |
3036 | |
3037 @itemize @bullet | |
3038 @item | |
3039 @findex reftex-label | |
3040 @vindex LaTeX-label-function, @r{AUCTeX} | |
3041 @kindex C-c C-e | |
3042 @kindex C-c C-s | |
3043 @findex LaTeX-section, @r{AUCTeX} | |
3044 @findex TeX-insert-macro, @r{AUCTeX} | |
3045 @b{AUCTeX calls @code{reftex-label} to insert labels}@* | |
3046 When a new section is created with @kbd{C-c C-s}, or a new environment | |
3047 is inserted with @kbd{C-c C-e}, AUCTeX normally prompts for a label to | |
3048 go with it. With the interface, @code{reftex-label} is called instead. | |
3049 For example, if you type @kbd{C-c C-e equation @key{RET}}, AUCTeX and | |
3050 @b{Ref@TeX{}} will insert | |
3051 | |
3052 @example | |
3053 \begin@{equation@} | |
3054 \label@{eq:1@} | |
3055 | |
3056 \end@{equation@} | |
3057 @end example | |
3058 | |
3059 @noindent | |
3060 without further prompts. | |
3061 | |
3062 Similarly, when you type @kbd{C-c C-s section @key{RET}}, @b{Ref@TeX{}} | |
3063 will offer its default label which is derived from the section title. | |
3064 | |
3065 @item | |
3066 @b{AUCTeX tells @b{Ref@TeX{}} about new sections}@* | |
3067 When creating a new section with @kbd{C-c C-s}, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will not | |
3068 have to rescan the buffer in order to see it.@refill | |
3069 | |
3070 @item | |
3071 @findex reftex-arg-label | |
3072 @findex TeX-arg-label, @r{AUCTeX function} | |
3073 @findex reftex-arg-ref | |
3074 @findex TeX-arg-ref, @r{AUCTeX function} | |
3075 @findex reftex-arg-cite | |
3076 @findex TeX-arg-cite, @r{AUCTeX function} | |
3077 @findex reftex-arg-index | |
3078 @findex TeX-arg-index, @r{AUCTeX function} | |
3079 @findex TeX-insert-macro, @r{AUCTeX function} | |
3080 @kindex C-c @key{RET} | |
3081 @b{@b{Ref@TeX{}} supplies macro arguments}@* When you insert a macro | |
3082 interactively with @kbd{C-c @key{RET}}, AUCTeX normally prompts for | |
3083 macro arguments. Internally, it uses the functions | |
3084 @code{TeX-arg-label}, @code{TeX-arg-cite}, and @code{TeX-arg-index} to | |
3085 prompt for arguments which are labels, citation keys and index entries. | |
3086 The interface takes over these functions@footnote{@code{fset} is used to | |
3087 do this, which is not reversible. However, @b{Ref@TeX{}} implements the | |
3088 old functionality when you later decide to turn off the interface.} and | |
3089 supplies the macro arguments with @b{Ref@TeX{}'s} mechanisms. For | |
3090 example, when you type @kbd{C-c @key{RET} ref @key{RET}}, @b{Ref@TeX{}} | |
3091 will supply its label selection process (@pxref{Referencing | |
3092 Labels}).@refill | |
3093 | |
3094 @item | |
3095 @b{@b{Ref@TeX{}} tells AUCTeX about new labels, citation-- and index keys}@* | |
3096 @b{Ref@TeX{}} will add all newly created labels to AUCTeX's completion list. | |
3097 @end itemize | |
3098 | |
3099 @node Style Files, Bib-Cite, AUCTeX-RefTeX Interface, AUCTeX | |
3100 @subsection Style Files | |
3101 @cindex Style files, AUCTeX | |
3102 @findex TeX-add-style-hook, @r{AUCTeX} | |
3103 Style files are Emacs Lisp files which are evaluated by AUCTeX in | |
3104 association with the @code{\documentclass} and @code{\usepackage} | |
29772
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
3105 commands of a document (@pxref{Style Files,,,auctex}). Support for |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
3106 @b{Ref@TeX{}} in such a style file is useful when the LaTeX style |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
3107 defines macros or environments connected with labels, citations, or the |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
3108 index. Many style files (e.g. @file{amsmath.el} or @file{natbib.el}) |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
3109 distributed with AUCTeX already support @b{Ref@TeX{}} in this |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
3110 way.@refill |
25829 | 3111 |
3112 Before calling a @b{Ref@TeX{}} function, the style hook should always | |
3113 test for the availability of the function, so that the style file will | |
3114 also work for people who do not use @b{Ref@TeX{}}. @refill | |
3115 | |
3116 Additions made with style files in the way described below remain local | |
3117 to the current document. For example, if one package uses AMSTeX, the | |
3118 style file will make @b{Ref@TeX{}} switch over to @code{\eqref}, but | |
3119 this will not affect other documents.@refill | |
3120 | |
3121 @findex reftex-add-label-environments | |
3122 @findex reftex-add-to-label-alist | |
3123 A style hook may contain calls to | |
3124 @code{reftex-add-label-environments}@footnote{This used to be the | |
3125 function @code{reftex-add-to-label-alist} which is still available as an | |
3126 alias for compatibility.} which defines additions to | |
3127 @code{reftex-label-alist}. The argument taken by this function must have | |
3128 the same format as @code{reftex-label-alist}. The @file{amsmath.el} | |
3129 style file of AUCTeX for example contains the following:@refill | |
3130 | |
3131 @lisp | |
3132 @group | |
3133 (TeX-add-style-hook "amsmath" | |
3134 (lambda () | |
3135 (if (fboundp 'reftex-add-label-environments) | |
3136 (reftex-add-label-environments '(AMSTeX))))) | |
3137 @end group | |
3138 @end lisp | |
3139 | |
3140 @noindent | |
3141 @findex LaTeX-add-environments, @r{AUCTeX} | |
3142 while a package @code{myprop} defining a @code{proposition} environment | |
3143 with @code{\newtheorem} might use@refill | |
3144 | |
3145 @lisp | |
3146 @group | |
3147 (TeX-add-style-hook "myprop" | |
3148 (lambda () | |
3149 (LaTeX-add-environments '("proposition" LaTeX-env-label)) | |
3150 (if (fboundp 'reftex-add-label-environments) | |
3151 (reftex-add-label-environments | |
3152 '(("proposition" ?p "prop:" "~\\ref@{%s@}" t | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3153 ("Proposition" "Prop.") -3)))))) |
25829 | 3154 @end group |
3155 @end lisp | |
3156 | |
3157 @findex reftex-set-cite-format | |
3158 Similarly, a style hook may contain a call to | |
3159 @code{reftex-set-cite-format} to set the citation format. The style | |
3160 file @file{natbib.el} for the Natbib citation style does switch | |
3161 @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s citation format like this:@refill | |
3162 | |
3163 @lisp | |
3164 (TeX-add-style-hook "natbib" | |
3165 (lambda () | |
3166 (if (fboundp 'reftex-set-cite-format) | |
3167 (reftex-set-cite-format 'natbib)))) | |
3168 @end lisp | |
3169 | |
3170 @findex reftex-add-index-macros | |
3171 The hook may contain a call to @code{reftex-add-index-macros} to | |
3172 define additional @code{\index}-like macros. The argument must have | |
3173 the same format as @code{reftex-index-macros}. It may be a symbol, to | |
3174 trigger support for one of the builtin index packages. For example, | |
3175 the style @file{multind.el} contains | |
3176 | |
3177 @lisp | |
3178 (TeX-add-style-hook "multind" | |
3179 (lambda () | |
3180 (and (fboundp 'reftex-add-index-macros) | |
3181 (reftex-add-index-macros '(multind))))) | |
3182 @end lisp | |
3183 | |
3184 If you have your own package @file{myindex} which defines the | |
3185 following macros to be used with the LaTeX @file{index.sty} file | |
3186 @example | |
3187 \newcommand@{\molec@}[1]@{#1\index@{Molecules!#1@}@} | |
3188 \newcommand@{\aindex@}[1]@{#1\index[author]@{#1@} | |
3189 @end example | |
3190 | |
3191 you could write this in the style file @file{myindex.el}: | |
3192 | |
3193 @lisp | |
3194 (TeX-add-style-hook "myindex" | |
3195 (lambda () | |
3196 (TeX-add-symbols | |
3197 '("molec" TeX-arg-index) | |
3198 '("aindex" TeX-arg-index)) | |
3199 (if (fboundp 'reftex-add-index-macros) | |
3200 (reftex-add-index-macros | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3201 '(("molec@{*@}" "idx" ?m "Molecules!" nil nil) |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3202 ("aindex@{*@}" "author" ?a "" nil nil)))))) |
25829 | 3203 @end lisp |
3204 | |
3205 @findex reftex-add-section-levels | |
3206 Finally the hook may contain a call to @code{reftex-add-section-levels} | |
3207 to define additional section statements. For example, the FoilTeX class | |
3208 has just two headers, @code{\foilhead} and @code{\rotatefoilhead}. Here | |
3209 is a style file @file{foils.el} that will inform @b{Ref@TeX{}} about these: | |
3210 | |
3211 @lisp | |
3212 (TeX-add-style-hook "foils" | |
3213 (lambda () | |
3214 (if (fboundp 'reftex-add-section-levels) | |
3215 (reftex-add-section-levels '(("foilhead" . 3) | |
3216 ("rotatefoilhead" . 3)))))) | |
3217 @end lisp | |
3218 | |
3219 @node Bib-Cite, , Style Files, AUCTeX | |
3220 @subsection Bib-Cite | |
3221 @cindex @code{bib-cite}, Emacs package | |
3222 @cindex Emacs packages, @code{bib-cite} | |
3223 | |
3224 Once you have written a document with labels, references and citations, | |
3225 it can be nice to read it like a hypertext document. @b{Ref@TeX{}} has | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3226 support for that: @code{reftex-view-crossref} (bound to @kbd{C-c |
37999
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
3227 &}), @code{reftex-mouse-view-crossref} (bound to @kbd{S-mouse-2}), and |
25829 | 3228 @code{reftex-search-document}. A somewhat fancier interface with mouse |
3229 highlighting is provided (among other things) by Peter S. Galbraith's | |
3230 @file{bib-cite.el}. There is some overlap in the functionalities of | |
3231 Bib-cite and @b{Ref@TeX{}}. Bib-cite.el comes bundled with | |
3232 AUCTeX.@refill | |
3233 | |
3234 Bib-cite version 3.06 and later can be configured so that bib-cite's | |
3235 mouse functions use @b{Ref@TeX{}} for displaying references and citations. | |
3236 This can be useful in particular when working with the LaTeX @code{xr} | |
3237 package or with an explicit @code{thebibliography} environment (rather | |
3238 than BibTeX). Bib-cite cannot handle those, but @b{Ref@TeX{}} does. To | |
3239 make use of this feature, try@refill | |
3240 | |
3241 @vindex bib-cite-use-reftex-view-crossref | |
3242 @lisp | |
3243 (setq bib-cite-use-reftex-view-crossref t) | |
3244 @end lisp | |
3245 | |
3246 @page | |
3247 @node Problems and Work-Arounds, Imprint, Optimizations, Top | |
3248 @section Problems and Work-arounds | |
3249 @cindex Problems and work-arounds | |
3250 | |
3251 @itemize @bullet | |
3252 @item | |
3253 @b{LaTeX commands}@* | |
3254 @cindex LaTeX commands, not found | |
46684
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3255 @code{\input}, @code{\include}, and @code{\section} (etc.) statements |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3256 have to be first on a line (except for white space).@refill |
25829 | 3257 |
3258 @item | |
3259 @b{Commented regions}@* | |
3260 @cindex Labels, commented out | |
3261 @b{Ref@TeX{}} sees also labels in regions commented out and will refuse to | |
3262 make duplicates of such labels. This is considered to be a feature.@refill | |
3263 | |
3264 @item | |
3265 @b{Wrong section numbers}@* | |
3266 @cindex Section numbers, wrong | |
3267 @vindex reftex-enable-partial-scans | |
3268 When using partial scans (@code{reftex-enable-partial-scans}), the section | |
3269 numbers in the table of contents may eventually become wrong. A full | |
3270 scan will fix this.@refill | |
3271 | |
3272 @item | |
3273 @b{Local settings}@* | |
3274 @cindex Settings, local | |
3275 @findex reftex-add-label-environments | |
3276 @findex reftex-set-cite-format | |
3277 @findex reftex-add-section-levels | |
3278 The label environment definitions in @code{reftex-label-alist} are | |
3279 global and apply to all documents. If you need to make definitions | |
3280 local to a document, because they would interfere with settings in other | |
3281 documents, you should use AUCTeX and set up style files with calls to | |
3282 @code{reftex-add-label-environments}, @code{reftex-set-cite-format}, | |
3283 @code{reftex-add-index-macros}, and @code{reftex-add-section-levels}. | |
3284 Settings made with these functions remain local to the current | |
3285 document. @xref{AUCTeX}.@refill | |
3286 | |
3287 @item | |
3288 @b{Funny display in selection buffer}@* | |
3289 @cindex @code{x-symbol}, Emacs package | |
3290 @cindex Emacs packages, @code{x-symbol} | |
3291 @cindex @code{isotex}, Emacs package | |
3292 @cindex Emacs packages, @code{isotex} | |
3293 @cindex @code{iso-cvt}, Emacs package | |
3294 @cindex Emacs packages, @code{iso-cvt} | |
3295 When using packages which make the buffer representation of a file | |
3296 different from its disk representation (e.g. x-symbol, isotex, | |
3297 iso-cvt) you may find that @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s parsing information sometimes | |
3298 reflects the disk state of a file. This happens only in @emph{unvisited} | |
3299 parts of a multifile document, because @b{Ref@TeX{}} visits these files | |
3300 literally for speed reasons. Then both short context and section | |
3301 headings may look different from what you usually see on your screen. | |
3302 In rare cases @code{reftex-toc} may have problems to jump to an affected | |
3303 section heading. There are three possible ways to deal with | |
3304 this:@refill | |
3305 @itemize @minus | |
3306 @item | |
3307 @vindex reftex-keep-temporary-buffers | |
3308 @code{(setq reftex-keep-temporary-buffers t)}@* | |
3309 This implies that @b{Ref@TeX{}} will load all parts of a multifile | |
3310 document into Emacs (i.e. there won't be any temporary buffers).@refill | |
3311 @item | |
3312 @vindex reftex-initialize-temporary-buffers | |
3313 @code{(setq reftex-initialize-temporary-buffers t)}@* | |
3314 This means full initialization of temporary buffers. It involves | |
3315 a penalty when the same unvisited file is used for lookup often.@refill | |
3316 @item | |
3317 Set @code{reftex-initialize-temporary-buffers} to a list of hook | |
3318 functions doing a minimal initialization.@refill | |
3319 @end itemize | |
3320 @vindex reftex-refontify-context | |
3321 See also the variable @code{reftex-refontify-context}. | |
3322 | |
3323 @item | |
3324 @b{Labels as arguments to \begin}@* | |
3325 @cindex @code{pf}, LaTeX package | |
3326 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{pf} | |
3327 Some packages use an additional argument to a @code{\begin} macro | |
3328 to specify a label. E.g. Lamport's @file{pf.sty} uses both | |
3329 @example | |
3330 \step@{@var{label}@}@{@var{claim}@} and \begin@{step+@}@{@var{label}@} | |
3331 @var{claim} | |
3332 \end@{step+@} | |
3333 @end example | |
3334 | |
3335 @noindent | |
3336 We need to trick @b{Ref@TeX{}} into swallowing this: | |
3337 | |
3338 @lisp | |
3339 @group | |
3340 ;; Configuration for Lamport's pf.sty | |
3341 (setq reftex-label-alist | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3342 '(("\\step@{*@}@{@}" ?p "st:" "~\\stepref@{%s@}" 2 ("Step" "St.")) |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3343 ("\\begin@{step+@}@{*@}" ?p "st:" "~\\stepref@{%s@}" 1000))) |
25829 | 3344 @end group |
3345 @end lisp | |
3346 | |
3347 @noindent | |
3348 The first line is just a normal configuration for a macro. For the | |
3349 @code{step+} environment we actually tell @b{Ref@TeX{}} to look for the | |
3350 @emph{macro} @samp{\begin@{step+@}} and interpret the @emph{first} | |
3351 argument (which really is a second argument to the macro @code{\begin}) | |
3352 as a label of type @code{?p}. Argument count for this macro starts only | |
3353 after the @samp{@{step+@}}, also when specifying how to get | |
3354 context.@refill | |
3355 | |
3356 @item | |
3357 @b{Idle timers in XEmacs}@* | |
3358 @cindex Idle timer restart | |
3359 @vindex reftex-use-itimer-in-xemacs | |
3360 In XEmacs, idle timer restart does not work reliably after fast | |
3361 keystrokes. Therefore @b{Ref@TeX{}} currently uses the post command | |
3362 hook to start the timer used for automatic crossref information. When | |
3363 this bug gets fixed, a real idle timer can be requested with | |
3364 @lisp | |
3365 (setq reftex-use-itimer-in-xemacs t) | |
3366 @end lisp | |
3367 | |
3368 @item | |
3369 @b{Viper mode}@* | |
3370 @cindex Viper mode | |
39267 | 3371 @cindex Key bindings, problems with Viper mode |
25829 | 3372 @findex viper-harness-minor-mode |
3373 With @i{Viper} mode prior to Vipers version 3.01, you need to protect | |
3374 @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s keymaps with@refill | |
3375 | |
3376 @lisp | |
3377 (viper-harness-minor-mode "reftex") | |
3378 @end lisp | |
3379 | |
3380 @end itemize | |
3381 | |
3382 @page | |
3383 @node Imprint, Commands, Problems and Work-Arounds, Top | |
3384 @section Imprint | |
3385 @cindex Imprint | |
3386 @cindex Maintainer | |
3387 @cindex Acknowledgments | |
3388 @cindex Thanks | |
3389 @cindex Bug reports | |
3390 @cindex @code{http}, @b{Ref@TeX{}} home page | |
3391 @cindex @code{ftp}, @b{Ref@TeX{}} site | |
3392 | |
46684
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3393 @b{Ref@TeX{}} was written by @i{@value{Carsten Dominik}} |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3394 @email{dominik@@science.uva.nl}, with contributions by @i{Stephen |
25829 | 3395 Eglen}. @b{Ref@TeX{}} is currently maintained by @refill |
3396 | |
3397 @noindent | |
46684
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3398 @value{Carsten Dominik} @email{dominik@@science.uva.nl} |
25829 | 3399 |
3400 If you have questions about @b{Ref@TeX{}}, there are several Usenet | |
3401 groups which have competent readers: @code{comp.emacs}, | |
3402 @code{gnu.emacs.help}, @code{comp.emacs.xemacs}, @code{comp.text.tex}. | |
3403 You can also write directly to the maintainer. | |
3404 | |
3405 If you find a bug in @b{Ref@TeX{}} or its documentation, or if you want | |
3406 to contribute code or ideas, please | |
46684
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3407 @uref{mailto:dominik@@science.uva.nl,contact the maintainer}. Remember |
25829 | 3408 to provide all necessary information such as version numbers of Emacs |
3409 and @b{Ref@TeX{}}, and the relevant part of your configuration in | |
3410 @file{.emacs}. When reporting a bug which throws an exception, please | |
3411 include a backtrace if you know how to produce one. | |
3412 | |
3413 @b{Ref@TeX{}} is bundled and pre-installed with Emacs since version 20.2. | |
3414 It was also bundled and pre-installed with XEmacs 19.16--20.x. XEmacs | |
3415 21.x users want to install the corresponding plugin package which is | |
3416 available from the XEmacs @code{ftp} site. See the XEmacs 21.x | |
3417 documentation on package installation for details.@refill | |
3418 | |
3419 Users of earlier Emacs distributions (including Emacs 19) can get a | |
3420 @b{Ref@TeX{}} distribution from the | |
3421 @uref{http://www.strw.leidenuniv.nl/~dominik/Tools/,maintainers | |
3422 webpage}. Note that the Emacs 19 version supports many but not all | |
3423 features described in this manual.@refill | |
3424 | |
3425 Thanks to the people on the Net who have used @b{Ref@TeX{}} and helped | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3426 developing it with their reports. In particular thanks to @i{Fran |
46684
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3427 Burstall, Alastair Burt, Lars Clausen, Soren Dayton, Stephen Eglen, Karl |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3428 Eichwalder, Erik Frik, Erik Frisk, Peter Galbraith, Kai Grossjohann, |
47050
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
3429 Frank Harrell, Stephan Heuel, Alan Ho, Lute Kamstra, Dieter Kraft, |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
3430 Adrian Lanz, Rory Molinari, Stefan Monnier, Laurent Mugnier, Sudeep |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
3431 Kumar Palat, Daniel Polani, Alan Shutko, Robin Socha, Richard Stanton, |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
3432 Allan Strand, Jan Vroonhof, Christoph Wedler, Alan Williams, Roland |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
3433 Winkler, Eli Zaretskii}.@refill |
25829 | 3434 |
3435 The @code{view-crossref} feature was inspired by @i{Peter Galbraith's} | |
3436 @file{bib-cite.el}.@refill | |
3437 | |
3438 Finally thanks to @i{Uwe Bolick} who first got me (some years ago) into | |
3439 supporting LaTeX labels and references with an editor (which was | |
3440 MicroEmacs at the time).@refill | |
3441 | |
3442 @node Commands, Options, Imprint, Top | |
3443 @chapter Commands | |
3444 @cindex Commands, list of | |
3445 | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3446 Here is a summary of @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s commands which can be executed from |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3447 LaTeX files. Command which are executed from the special buffers are |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3448 not described here. All commands are available from the @code{Ref} |
39267 | 3449 menu. See @xref{Key Bindings}. |
25829 | 3450 |
3451 @deffn Command reftex-toc | |
3452 Show the table of contents for the current document. When called with | |
3453 one ore two @kbd{C-u} prefixes, rescan the document first.@refill | |
3454 @end deffn | |
3455 | |
3456 @deffn Command reftex-label | |
3457 Insert a unique label. With one or two @kbd{C-u} prefixes, enforce | |
3458 document rescan first. | |
3459 @end deffn | |
3460 | |
3461 @deffn Command reftex-reference | |
3462 Start a selection process to select a label, and insert a reference to | |
3463 it. With one or two @kbd{C-u} prefixes, enforce document rescan first. | |
3464 @end deffn | |
3465 | |
3466 @deffn Command reftex-citation | |
3467 Make a citation using BibTeX database files. After prompting for a regular | |
3468 expression, scans the buffers with BibTeX entries (taken from the | |
3469 @code{\bibliography} command or a @code{thebibliography} environment) | |
3470 and offers the matching entries for selection. The selected entry is | |
46918
82d113655734
Minor spelling and grammar corrections.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
46684
diff
changeset
|
3471 formatted according to @code{reftex-cite-format} and inserted into the |
25829 | 3472 buffer.@refill @* |
3473 When called with one or two @kbd{C-u} prefixes, first rescans the | |
3474 document. When called with a numeric prefix, make that many citations. | |
3475 When called with point inside the braces of a @code{\cite} command, it | |
3476 will add another key, ignoring the value of | |
3477 @code{reftex-cite-format}.@refill @* | |
3478 The regular expression uses an expanded syntax: @samp{&&} is interpreted | |
3479 as @code{and}. Thus, @samp{aaaa&&bbb} matches entries which contain | |
3480 both @samp{aaaa} and @samp{bbb}. While entering the regexp, completion | |
3481 on knows citation keys is possible. @samp{=} is a good regular | |
3482 expression to match all entries in all files.@refill | |
3483 @end deffn | |
3484 | |
3485 @deffn Command reftex-index | |
3486 Query for an index macro and insert it along with its arguments. The | |
3487 index macros available are those defined in @code{reftex-index-macro} or | |
3488 by a call to @code{reftex-add-index-macros}, typically from an AUCTeX | |
3489 style file. @b{Ref@TeX{}} provides completion for the index tag and the | |
3490 index key, and will prompt for other arguments.@refill | |
3491 @end deffn | |
3492 | |
3493 @deffn Command reftex-index-selection-or-word | |
3494 Put current selection or the word near point into the default index | |
3495 macro. This uses the information in @code{reftex-index-default-macro} | |
3496 to make an index entry. The phrase indexed is the current selection or | |
3497 the word near point. When called with one @kbd{C-u} prefix, let the | |
3498 user have a chance to edit the index entry. When called with 2 | |
3499 @kbd{C-u} as prefix, also ask for the index macro and other stuff. When | |
3500 called inside TeX math mode as determined by the @file{texmathp.el} | |
3501 library which is part of AUCTeX, the string is first processed with the | |
3502 @code{reftex-index-math-format}, which see.@refill | |
3503 @end deffn | |
3504 | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3505 @deffn Command reftex-index-phrase-selection-or-word |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3506 Add current selection or the word at point to the phrases buffer. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3507 When you are in transient-mark-mode and the region is active, the |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3508 selection will be used - otherwise the word at point. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3509 You get a chance to edit the entry in the phrases buffer - to save the |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3510 buffer and return to the LaTeX document, finish with @kbd{C-c C-c}. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3511 @end deffn |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3512 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3513 @deffn Command reftex-index-visit-phrases-buffer |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3514 Switch to the phrases buffer, initialize if empty. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3515 @end deffn |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3516 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3517 @deffn Command reftex-index-phrases-apply-to-region |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3518 Index all index phrases in the current region. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3519 This works exactly like global indexing from the index phrases buffer, |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3520 but operation is restricted to the current region. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3521 @end deffn |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3522 |
25829 | 3523 @deffn Command reftex-display-index |
3524 Display a buffer with an index compiled from the current document. | |
3525 When the document has multiple indices, first prompts for the correct one. | |
3526 When index support is turned off, offer to turn it on. | |
3527 With one or two @kbd{C-u} prefixes, rescan document first. | |
3528 With prefix 2, restrict index to current document section. | |
3529 With prefix 3, restrict index to active region.@refill | |
3530 @end deffn | |
3531 | |
3532 @deffn Command reftex-view-crossref | |
3533 View cross reference of macro at point. Point must be on the @var{key} | |
3534 argument. Works with the macros @code{\label}, @code{\ref}, | |
3535 @code{\cite}, @code{\bibitem}, @code{\index} and many derivatives of | |
3536 these. Where it makes sense, subsequent calls show additional | |
3537 locations. See also the variable @code{reftex-view-crossref-extra} and | |
3538 the command @code{reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex}. With one or two | |
3539 @kbd{C-u} prefixes, enforce rescanning of the document. With argument | |
3540 2, select the window showing the cross reference. | |
3541 @end deffn | |
3542 | |
3543 @deffn Command reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex | |
3544 View location in a LaTeX document which cites the BibTeX entry at point. | |
3545 Since BibTeX files can be used by many LaTeX documents, this function | |
3546 prompts upon first use for a buffer in @b{Ref@TeX{}} mode. To reset this | |
46684
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3547 link to a document, call the function with a prefix arg. Calling |
25829 | 3548 this function several times find successive citation locations. |
3549 @end deffn | |
3550 | |
3551 @deffn Command reftex-create-tags-file | |
3552 Create TAGS file by running @code{etags} on the current document. The | |
3553 TAGS file is also immediately visited with | |
3554 @code{visit-tags-table}.@refill | |
3555 @end deffn | |
3556 | |
3557 @deffn Command reftex-grep-document | |
3558 Run grep query through all files related to this document. | |
3559 With prefix arg, force to rescan document. | |
3560 No active TAGS table is required.@refill | |
3561 @end deffn | |
3562 | |
3563 @deffn Command reftex-search-document | |
3564 Regexp search through all files of the current document. | |
3565 Starts always in the master file. Stops when a match is found. | |
3566 No active TAGS table is required.@refill | |
3567 @end deffn | |
3568 | |
3569 @deffn Command reftex-query-replace-document | |
3570 Run a query-replace-regexp of @var{from} with @var{to} over the entire | |
3571 document. With prefix arg, replace only word-delimited matches. No | |
3572 active TAGS table is required.@refill | |
3573 @end deffn | |
3574 | |
47050
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
3575 @deffn Command reftex-goto-label |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
3576 Prompt for a label (with completion) and jump to the location of this |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
3577 label. Optional prefix argument @var{other-window} goes to the label in |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
3578 another window. |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
3579 @end deffn |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
3580 |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
3581 |
25829 | 3582 @deffn Command reftex-change-label |
3583 Query replace @var{from} with @var{to} in all @code{\label} and | |
3584 @code{\ref} commands. Works on the entire multifile document. No | |
3585 active TAGS table is required.@refill | |
3586 @end deffn | |
3587 | |
3588 @deffn Command reftex-renumber-simple-labels | |
3589 Renumber all simple labels in the document to make them sequentially. | |
3590 Simple labels are the ones created by RefTeX, consisting only of the | |
3591 prefix and a number. After the command completes, all these labels will | |
3592 have sequential numbers throughout the document. Any references to the | |
3593 labels will be changed as well. For this, @b{Ref@TeX{}} looks at the | |
3594 arguments of any macros which either start or end with the string | |
3595 @samp{ref}. This command should be used with care, in particular in | |
3596 multifile documents. You should not use it if another document refers | |
3597 to this one with the @code{xr} package.@refill | |
3598 @end deffn | |
3599 | |
3600 @deffn Command reftex-find-duplicate-labels | |
3601 Produce a list of all duplicate labels in the document.@refill | |
3602 @end deffn | |
3603 | |
3604 @deffn Command reftex-customize | |
3605 Run the customize browser on the @b{Ref@TeX{}} group. | |
3606 @end deffn | |
3607 @deffn Command reftex-show-commentary | |
3608 Show the commentary section from @file{reftex.el}. | |
3609 @end deffn | |
3610 @deffn Command reftex-info | |
3611 Run info on the top @b{Ref@TeX{}} node. | |
3612 @end deffn | |
3613 @deffn Command reftex-parse-document | |
3614 Parse the entire document in order to update the parsing information. | |
3615 @end deffn | |
3616 @deffn Command reftex-reset-mode | |
3617 Enforce rebuilding of several internal lists and variables. Also | |
3618 removes the parse file associated with the current document. | |
3619 @end deffn | |
3620 | |
3621 @node Options, Keymaps and Hooks, Commands, Top | |
3622 @chapter Options, Keymaps, Hooks | |
3623 @cindex Options, list of | |
3624 | |
3625 Here is a complete list of @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s configuration variables. All | |
3626 variables have customize support - so if you are not familiar with Emacs | |
3627 Lisp (and even if you are) you might find it more comfortable to use | |
3628 @code{customize} to look at and change these variables. @kbd{M-x | |
3629 reftex-customize} will get you there.@refill | |
3630 | |
3631 @menu | |
3632 * Options (Table of Contents):: | |
3633 * Options (Defining Label Environments):: | |
3634 * Options (Creating Labels):: | |
3635 * Options (Referencing Labels):: | |
3636 * Options (Creating Citations):: | |
3637 * Options (Index Support):: | |
3638 * Options (Viewing Cross-References):: | |
3639 * Options (Finding Files):: | |
3640 * Options (Optimizations):: | |
3641 * Options (Fontification):: | |
3642 * Options (Misc):: | |
3643 @end menu | |
3644 | |
3645 @node Options (Table of Contents), Options (Defining Label Environments), , Options | |
3646 @section Table of Contents | |
3647 @cindex Options, table of contents | |
3648 @cindex Table of contents, options | |
3649 | |
46684
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3650 @defopt reftex-include-file-commands |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3651 List of LaTeX commands which input another file. |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3652 The file name is expected after the command, either in braces or separated |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3653 by whitespace. |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3654 @end defopt |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3655 |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3656 @defopt reftex-max-section-depth |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3657 Maximum depth of section levels in document structure. |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3658 Standard LaTeX needs 7, default is 12. |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3659 @end defopt |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3660 |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3661 @defopt reftex-section-levels |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3662 Commands and levels used for defining sections in the document. The |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3663 @code{car} of each cons cell is the name of the section macro. The |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3664 @code{cdr} is a number indicating its level. A negative level means the |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3665 same as the positive value, but the section will never get a |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3666 number. The @code{cdr} may also be a function which then has to return |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3667 the level.@refill |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3668 @end defopt |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3669 |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3670 @defopt reftex-toc-max-level |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3671 The maximum level of toc entries which will be included in the TOC. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3672 Section headings with a bigger level will be ignored. In RefTeX, |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3673 chapters are level 1, sections level 2 etc. This variable can be |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3674 changed from within the @file{*toc*} buffer with the @kbd{t} key.@refill |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3675 @end defopt |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3676 |
47050
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
3677 @defopt reftex-part-resets-chapter |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
3678 Non-@code{nil} means, @code{\part} is like any other sectioning command. |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
3679 This means, part numbers will be included in the numbering of chapters, and |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
3680 chapter counters will be reset for each part. |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
3681 When @code{nil} (the default), parts are special, do not reset the |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
3682 chapter counter and also do not show up in chapter numbers. |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
3683 @end defopt |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
3684 |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
3685 @defopt reftex-auto-recenter-toc |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
3686 Non-@code{nil} means, initially turn automatic recentering of toc on. |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
3687 When active, the @file{*TOC*} buffer will always show the section you |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
3688 are currently working in. Recentering happens whenever Emacs is idle |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
3689 for more than `reftex-idle-time' seconds. |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
3690 This feature can be turned on and off from the menu |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
3691 (Ref->Options). |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
3692 @end defopt |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
3693 |
46684
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3694 @defopt reftex-toc-split-windows-horizontally |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3695 Non-@code{nil} means, create TOC window by splitting window |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3696 horizontally. The default is to split vertically. |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3697 @end defopt |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3698 |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3699 @defopt reftex-toc-split-windows-horizontally-fraction |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3700 Fraction of the horizontal width of the frame to be used for TOC window. |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3701 Only relevant when @code{reftex-toc-split-windows-horizontally} is |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3702 non-@code{nil}. |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3703 @end defopt |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3704 |
25829 | 3705 @defopt reftex-toc-keep-other-windows |
3706 Non-@code{nil} means, split the selected window to display the | |
3707 @file{*toc*} buffer. This helps to keep the window configuration, but | |
3708 makes the @file{*toc*} small. When @code{nil}, all other windows except | |
3709 the selected one will be deleted, so that the @file{*toc*} window fills | |
3710 half the frame.@refill | |
3711 @end defopt | |
3712 | |
3713 @defopt reftex-toc-include-file-boundaries | |
3714 Non-@code{nil} means, include file boundaries in @file{*toc*} buffer. | |
3715 This flag can be toggled from within the @file{*toc*} buffer with the | |
3716 @kbd{i} key.@refill | |
3717 @end defopt | |
3718 | |
3719 @defopt reftex-toc-include-labels | |
3720 Non-@code{nil} means, include labels in @file{*toc*} buffer. This flag | |
3721 can be toggled from within the @file{*toc*} buffer with the @kbd{l} | |
3722 key.@refill | |
3723 @end defopt | |
3724 | |
3725 @defopt reftex-toc-include-index-entries | |
3726 Non-@code{nil} means, include index entries in @file{*toc*} buffer. | |
3727 This flag can be toggled from within the @file{*toc*} buffer with the | |
3728 @kbd{i} key. | |
3729 @end defopt | |
3730 | |
3731 @defopt reftex-toc-include-context | |
3732 Non-@code{nil} means, include context with labels in the @file{*toc*} | |
3733 buffer. Context will only be shown if the labels are visible as well. | |
3734 This flag can be toggled from within the @file{*toc*} buffer with the | |
3735 @kbd{c} key.@refill | |
3736 @end defopt | |
3737 | |
3738 @defopt reftex-toc-follow-mode | |
3739 Non-@code{nil} means, point in @file{*toc*} buffer (the | |
3740 table-of-contents buffer) will cause other window to follow. The other | |
3741 window will show the corresponding part of the document. This flag can | |
3742 be toggled from within the @file{*toc*} buffer with the @kbd{f} | |
3743 key.@refill | |
3744 @end defopt | |
3745 | |
3746 @deffn {Normal Hook} reftex-toc-mode-hook | |
3747 Normal hook which is run when a @file{*toc*} buffer is | |
3748 created.@refill | |
3749 @end deffn | |
3750 | |
3751 @deffn Keymap reftex-toc-map | |
3752 The keymap which is active in the @file{*toc*} buffer. | |
3753 (@pxref{Table of Contents}).@refill | |
3754 @end deffn | |
3755 | |
3756 @node Options (Defining Label Environments), Options (Creating Labels), Options (Table of Contents), Options | |
3757 @section Defining Label Environments | |
3758 @cindex Options, defining label environments | |
3759 @cindex Defining label environments, options | |
3760 | |
3761 @defopt reftex-default-label-alist-entries | |
3762 Default label alist specifications. It is a list of symbols with | |
3763 associations in the constant @code{reftex-label-alist-builtin}. | |
3764 @code{LaTeX} should always be the last entry.@refill | |
3765 @end defopt | |
3766 | |
3767 @defopt reftex-label-alist | |
3768 Set this variable to define additions and changes to the defaults in | |
3769 @code{reftex-default-label-alist-entries}. The only things you | |
3770 @emph{must not} change is that @code{?s} is the type indicator for | |
3771 section labels, and @key{SPC} for the @code{any} label type. These are | |
3772 hard-coded at other places in the code.@refill | |
3773 | |
3774 The value of the variable must be a list of items. Each item is a list | |
3775 itself and has the following structure: | |
3776 | |
3777 @example | |
3778 (@var{env-or-macro} @var{type-key} @var{label-prefix} @var{reference-format} | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3779 @var{context-method} (@var{magic-word} ... ) @var{toc-level}) |
25829 | 3780 @end example |
3781 | |
3782 Each list entry describes either an environment carrying a counter for | |
3783 use with @code{\label} and @code{\ref}, or a LaTeX macro defining a | |
3784 label as (or inside) one of its arguments. The elements of each list | |
3785 entry are:@refill | |
3786 | |
3787 @table @asis | |
3788 @item @var{env-or-macro} | |
3789 Name of the environment (like @samp{table}) or macro (like | |
3790 @samp{\myfig}). For macros, indicate the arguments, as in | |
3791 @samp{\myfig[]@{@}@{@}@{*@}@{@}}. Use square brackets for optional | |
3792 arguments, a star to mark the label argument, if any. The macro does | |
3793 not have to have a label argument - you could also use | |
3794 @samp{\label@{...@}} inside one of its arguments.@refill | |
3795 | |
3796 Special names: @code{section} for section labels, @code{any} to define a | |
3797 group which contains all labels.@refill | |
3798 | |
3799 This may also be a function to do local parsing and identify point to be | |
46684
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
3800 in a non-standard label environment. The function must take an |
25829 | 3801 argument @var{bound} and limit backward searches to this value. It |
3802 should return either nil or a cons cell @code{(@var{function} | |
3803 . @var{position})} with the function symbol and the position where the | |
3804 special environment starts. See the Info documentation for an | |
3805 example.@refill | |
3806 | |
3807 Finally this may also be @code{nil} if the entry is only meant to change | |
3808 some settings associated with the type indicator character (see | |
3809 below).@refill | |
3810 | |
3811 @item @var{type-key} | |
3812 Type indicator character, like @code{?t}, must be a printable ASCII | |
3813 character. The type indicator is a single character which defines a | |
3814 label type. Any label inside the environment or macro is assumed to | |
3815 belong to this type. The same character may occur several times in this | |
3816 list, to cover cases in which different environments carry the same | |
3817 label type (like @code{equation} and @code{eqnarray}). If the type | |
3818 indicator is @code{nil} and the macro has a label argument @samp{@{*@}}, | |
3819 the macro defines neutral labels just like @code{\label}. In this case | |
3820 the reminder of this entry is ignored.@refill | |
3821 | |
3822 @item @var{label-prefix} | |
3823 Label prefix string, like @samp{tab:}. The prefix is a short string | |
3824 used as the start of a label. It may be the empty string. The prefix | |
3825 may contain the following @samp{%} escapes:@refill | |
3826 | |
3827 @example | |
3828 %f Current file name, directory and extension stripped. | |
3829 %F Current file name relative to master file directory. | |
3830 %u User login name, on systems which support this. | |
3831 %S A section prefix derived with variable @code{reftex-section-prefixes}. | |
3832 @end example | |
3833 | |
3834 @noindent | |
3835 Example: In a file @file{intro.tex}, @samp{eq:%f:} will become | |
3836 @samp{eq:intro:}.@refill | |
3837 | |
3838 @item @var{reference-format} | |
3839 Format string for reference insert in buffer. @samp{%s} will be | |
3840 replaced by the label. When the format starts with @samp{~}, this | |
3841 @samp{~} will only be inserted when the character before point is | |
3842 @emph{not} a whitespace.@refill | |
3843 | |
3844 @item @var{context-method} | |
3845 Indication on how to find the short context. | |
3846 @itemize @minus | |
3847 @item | |
3848 If @code{nil}, use the text following the @samp{\label@{...@}} macro.@refill | |
3849 @item | |
3850 If @code{t}, use | |
3851 @itemize @minus | |
3852 @item | |
3853 the section heading for section labels. | |
3854 @item | |
3855 text following the @samp{\begin@{...@}} statement of environments (not | |
3856 a good choice for environments like eqnarray or enumerate, where one has | |
3857 several labels in a single environment).@refill | |
3858 @item | |
3859 text after the macro name (starting with the first arg) for | |
3860 macros.@refill | |
3861 @end itemize | |
3862 @item | |
3863 If an integer, use the nth argument of the macro. As a special case, | |
3864 1000 means to get text after the last macro argument.@refill | |
3865 @item | |
3866 If a string, use as regexp to search @emph{backward} from the label. | |
3867 Context is then the text following the end of the match. E.g. putting | |
3868 this to @samp{\\caption[[@{]} will use the caption in a figure or table | |
3869 environment. @samp{\\begin@{eqnarray@}\|\\\\} works for | |
3870 eqnarrays.@refill | |
3871 @item | |
3872 If any of @code{caption}, @code{item}, @code{eqnarray-like}, | |
3873 @code{alignat-like}, this symbol will internally be translated into an | |
3874 appropriate regexp (see also the variable | |
3875 @code{reftex-default-context-regexps}).@refill | |
3876 @item | |
3877 If a function, call this function with the name of the environment/macro | |
3878 as argument. On call, point will be just after the @code{\label} macro. | |
3879 The function is expected to return a suitable context string. It should | |
3880 throw an exception (error) when failing to find context. As an example, | |
3881 here is a function returning the 10 chars following the label macro as | |
3882 context:@refill | |
3883 | |
3884 @example | |
3885 (defun my-context-function (env-or-mac) | |
3886 (if (> (point-max) (+ 10 (point))) | |
3887 (buffer-substring (point) (+ 10 (point))) | |
3888 (error "Buffer too small"))) | |
3889 @end example | |
3890 @end itemize | |
3891 | |
3892 Label context is used in two ways by @b{Ref@TeX{}}: For display in the label | |
3893 menu, and to derive a label string. If you want to use a different | |
3894 method for each of these, specify them as a dotted pair. | |
3895 E.g. @code{(nil . t)} uses the text after the label (@code{nil}) for | |
3896 display, and text from the default position (@code{t}) to derive a label | |
3897 string. This is actually used for section labels.@refill | |
3898 | |
3899 @item @var{magic-word-list} | |
3900 List of magic words which identify a reference to be of this type. If | |
3901 the word before point is equal to one of these words when calling | |
3902 @code{reftex-reference}, the label list offered will be automatically | |
3903 restricted to labels of the correct type. If the first element of this | |
3904 word--list is the symbol `regexp', the strings are interpreted as regular | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3905 expressions.@refill |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3906 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3907 @item @var{toc-level} |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3908 The integer level at which this environment should be added to the table |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3909 of contents. See also @code{reftex-section-levels}. A positive value |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3910 will number the entries mixed with the sectioning commands of the same |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3911 level. A negative value will make unnumbered entries. Useful only for |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3912 theorem-like environments which structure the document. Will be ignored |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3913 for macros. When omitted or @code{nil}, no TOC entries will be |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3914 made.@refill |
25829 | 3915 @end table |
3916 | |
3917 If the type indicator characters of two or more entries are the same, | |
3918 @b{Ref@TeX{}} will use@refill | |
3919 @itemize @minus | |
3920 @item | |
3921 the first non-@code{nil} format and prefix | |
3922 @item | |
3923 the magic words of all involved entries. | |
3924 @end itemize | |
3925 | |
3926 Any list entry may also be a symbol. If that has an association in | |
3927 @code{reftex-label-alist-builtin}, the @code{cddr} of that association is | |
3928 spliced into the list. However, builtin defaults should normally be set | |
3929 with the variable @code{reftex-default-label-alist-entries}.@refill | |
3930 @end defopt | |
3931 | |
3932 @defopt reftex-section-prefixes | |
3933 Prefixes for section labels. When the label prefix given in an entry in | |
3934 @code{reftex-label-alist} contains @samp{%S}, this list is used to | |
3935 determine the correct prefix string depending on the current section | |
3936 level. The list is an alist, with each entry of the form | |
3937 @w{@code{(@var{key} . @var{prefix})}}. Possible keys are sectioning macro | |
3938 names like @samp{chapter}, integer section levels (as given in | |
3939 @code{reftex-section-levels}), and @code{t} for the default. | |
3940 @end defopt | |
3941 | |
3942 @defopt reftex-default-context-regexps | |
3943 Alist with default regular expressions for finding context. The emacs | |
3944 lisp form @w{@code{(format regexp (regexp-quote environment))}} is used | |
3945 to calculate the final regular expression - so @samp{%s} will be | |
3946 replaced with the environment or macro.@refill | |
3947 @end defopt | |
3948 | |
3949 @node Options (Creating Labels), Options (Referencing Labels), Options (Defining Label Environments), Options | |
3950 @section Creating Labels | |
3951 @cindex Options, creating labels | |
3952 @cindex Creating labels, options | |
3953 | |
3954 @defopt reftex-insert-label-flags | |
3955 Flags governing label insertion. The value has the form | |
3956 | |
3957 @example | |
3958 (@var{derive} @var{prompt}) | |
3959 @end example | |
3960 | |
3961 If @var{derive}is @code{t}, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will try to derive a sensible | |
3962 label from context. A section label for example will be derived from | |
3963 the section heading. The conversion of the context to a legal label is | |
3964 governed by the specifications given in | |
3965 @code{reftex-derive-label-parameters}. If @var{derive} is @code{nil}, | |
3966 the default label will consist of the prefix and a unique number, like | |
3967 @samp{eq:23}.@refill | |
3968 | |
3969 If @var{prompt} is @code{t}, the user will be prompted for a label | |
3970 string. When @var{prompt} is @code{nil}, the default label will be | |
3971 inserted without query.@refill | |
3972 | |
3973 So the combination of @var{derive} and @var{prompt} controls label | |
3974 insertion. Here is a table describing all four possibilities:@refill | |
3975 | |
3976 @example | |
3977 @group | |
3978 @var{derive} @var{prompt} @var{action} | |
3979 ----------------------------------------------------------- | |
3980 nil nil @r{Insert simple label, like @samp{eq:22} or @samp{sec:13}. No query.} | |
3981 nil t @r{Prompt for label.} | |
3982 t nil @r{Derive a label from context and insert. No query.} | |
3983 t t @r{Derive a label from context, prompt for confirmation.} | |
3984 @end group | |
3985 @end example | |
3986 | |
3987 Each flag may be set to @code{t}, @code{nil}, or a string of label type | |
3988 letters indicating the label types for which it should be true. Thus, | |
3989 the combination may be set differently for each label type. The default | |
3990 settings @samp{"s"} and @samp{"sft"} mean: Derive section labels from | |
3991 headings (with confirmation). Prompt for figure and table labels. Use | |
3992 simple labels without confirmation for everything else.@refill | |
3993 | |
3994 The available label types are: @code{s} (section), @code{f} (figure), | |
3995 @code{t} (table), @code{i} (item), @code{e} (equation), @code{n} | |
3996 (footnote), @code{N} (endnote) plus any definitions in | |
3997 @code{reftex-label-alist}.@refill | |
3998 @end defopt | |
3999 | |
4000 @deffn Hook reftex-format-label-function | |
4001 If non-@code{nil}, should be a function which produces the string to | |
4002 insert as a label definition. The function will be called with two | |
4003 arguments, the @var{label} and the @var{default-format} (usually | |
4004 @samp{\label@{%s@}}). It should return the string to insert into the | |
4005 buffer.@refill | |
4006 @end deffn | |
4007 | |
4008 @deffn Hook reftex-string-to-label-function | |
4009 Function to turn an arbitrary string into a legal label. | |
4010 @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s default function uses the variable | |
4011 @code{reftex-derive-label-parameters}.@refill | |
4012 @end deffn | |
4013 | |
4014 @deffn Hook reftex-translate-to-ascii-function | |
4015 Filter function which will process a context string before it is used to | |
4016 derive a label from it. The intended application is to convert ISO or | |
4017 Mule characters into something legal in labels. The default function | |
4018 @code{reftex-latin1-to-ascii} removes the accents from Latin-1 | |
4019 characters. X-Symbol (>=2.6) sets this variable to the much more | |
4020 general @code{x-symbol-translate-to-ascii}.@refill | |
4021 @end deffn | |
4022 | |
4023 @defopt reftex-derive-label-parameters | |
4024 Parameters for converting a string into a label. This variable is a | |
4025 list of the following items:@refill | |
4026 @table @asis | |
4027 @item @var{nwords} | |
4028 Number of words to use. | |
4029 @item @var{maxchar} | |
4030 Maximum number of characters in a label string. | |
4031 @item @var{illegal} | |
4032 @code{nil}: Throw away any words containing characters illegal in labels.@* | |
4033 @code{t}: Throw away only the illegal characters, not the whole word. | |
4034 @item @var{abbrev} | |
4035 @code{nil}: Never abbreviate words.@* | |
4036 @code{t}: Always abbreviate words (see @code{reftex-abbrev-parameters}).@* | |
4037 @code{1}: Abbreviate words if necessary to shorten label string. | |
4038 @item @var{separator} | |
4039 String separating different words in the label. | |
4040 @item @var{ignorewords} | |
4041 List of words which should not be part of labels. | |
4042 @item @var{downcase} | |
4043 @code{t}: Downcase words before putting them into the label.@* | |
4044 @end table | |
4045 @end defopt | |
4046 | |
4047 @defopt reftex-label-illegal-re | |
4048 Regexp matching characters not legal in labels. | |
4049 @end defopt | |
4050 | |
4051 @defopt reftex-abbrev-parameters | |
4052 Parameters for abbreviation of words. A list of four parameters.@refill | |
4053 @table @asis | |
4054 @item @var{min-chars} | |
4055 Minimum number of characters remaining after abbreviation. | |
4056 @item @var{min-kill} | |
4057 Minimum number of characters to remove when abbreviating words.@refill | |
4058 @item @var{before} | |
4059 Character class before abbrev point in word.@refill | |
4060 @item @var{after} | |
4061 Character class after abbrev point in word.@refill | |
4062 @end table | |
4063 @end defopt | |
4064 | |
4065 @node Options (Referencing Labels), Options (Creating Citations), Options (Creating Labels), Options | |
4066 @section Referencing Labels | |
4067 @cindex Options, referencing labels | |
4068 @cindex Referencing labels, options | |
4069 | |
4070 @defopt reftex-label-menu-flags | |
4071 List of flags governing the label menu makeup. The flags are: | |
4072 @table @asis | |
4073 @item @var{table-of-contents} | |
4074 Show the labels embedded in a table of context.@refill | |
4075 @item @var{section-numbers} | |
4076 Include section numbers (like 4.1.3) in table of contents.@refill | |
4077 @item @var{counters} | |
4078 Show counters. This just numbers the labels in the menu.@refill | |
4079 @item @var{no-context} | |
4080 Non-@code{nil} means do @emph{not} show the short context.@refill | |
4081 @item @var{follow} | |
4082 Follow full context in other window.@refill | |
4083 @item @var{show-commented} | |
4084 Show labels from regions which are commented out.@refill | |
4085 @item @var{match-everywhere} | |
4086 Obsolete flag.@refill | |
4087 @item @var{show-files} | |
4088 Show begin and end of included files.@refill | |
4089 @end table | |
4090 | |
4091 Each of these flags can be set to @code{t} or @code{nil}, or to a string | |
4092 of type letters indicating the label types for which it should be true. | |
4093 These strings work like character classes in regular expressions. Thus, | |
4094 setting one of the flags to @samp{"sf"} makes the flag true for section | |
4095 and figure labels, @code{nil} for everything else. Setting it to | |
4096 @samp{"^sf"} makes it the other way round.@refill | |
4097 | |
4098 The available label types are: @code{s} (section), @code{f} (figure), | |
4099 @code{t} (table), @code{i} (item), @code{e} (equation), @code{n} | |
4100 (footnote), plus any definitions in @code{reftex-label-alist}.@refill | |
4101 | |
4102 Most options can also be switched from the label menu itself - so if you | |
4103 decide here to not have a table of contents in the label menu, you can | |
4104 still get one interactively during selection from the label menu.@refill | |
4105 @end defopt | |
4106 | |
4107 @defopt reftex-multiref-punctuation | |
4108 Punctuation strings for multiple references. When marking is used in | |
4109 the selection buffer to select several references, this variable | |
4110 associates the 3 marking characters @samp{,-+} with prefix strings to be | |
4111 inserted into the buffer before the corresponding @code{\ref} macro. | |
4112 This is used to string together whole reference sets, like | |
4113 @samp{eqs. 1,2,3-5,6 and 7} in a single call to | |
4114 @code{reftex-reference}.@refill | |
4115 @end defopt | |
4116 | |
4117 @defopt reftex-vref-is-default | |
4118 Non-@code{nil} means, the varioref macro @code{\vref} is used as | |
4119 default. In the selection buffer, the @kbd{v} key toggles the reference | |
4120 macro between @code{\ref} and @code{\vref}. The value of this variable | |
4121 determines the default which is active when entering the selection | |
4122 process. Instead of @code{nil} or @code{t}, this may also be a string | |
4123 of type letters indicating the label types for which it should be | |
4124 true.@refill | |
4125 @end defopt | |
4126 | |
4127 @defopt reftex-fref-is-default | |
4128 Non-@code{nil} means, the fancyref macro @code{\fref} is used as | |
4129 default. In the selection buffer, the @kbd{V} key toggles the reference | |
4130 macro between @code{\ref}, @code{\fref} and @code{\Fref}. The value of | |
4131 this variable determines the default which is active when entering the | |
4132 selection process. Instead of @code{nil} or @code{t}, this may also be | |
4133 a string of type letters indicating the label types for which it should | |
4134 be true. | |
4135 @end defopt | |
4136 | |
4137 @deffn Hook reftex-format-ref-function | |
4138 If non-@code{nil}, should be a function which produces the string to | |
4139 insert as a reference. Note that the insertion format can also be | |
4140 changed with @code{reftex-label-alist}. This hook also is used by the | |
4141 special commands to insert @code{\vref} and @code{\fref} references, so | |
4142 even if you set this, your setting will be ignored by the special | |
4143 commands. The function will be called with two arguments, the | |
4144 @var{label} and the @var{default-format} (usually @samp{~\ref@{%s@}}). | |
4145 It should return the string to insert into the buffer.@refill | |
4146 @end deffn | |
4147 | |
4148 @defopt reftex-level-indent | |
4149 Number of spaces to be used for indentation per section level.@refill | |
4150 @end defopt | |
4151 | |
4152 @defopt reftex-guess-label-type | |
4153 Non-@code{nil} means, @code{reftex-reference} will try to guess the | |
4154 label type. To do that, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will look at the word before the | |
4155 cursor and compare it with the magic words given in | |
4156 @code{reftex-label-alist}. When it finds a match, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will | |
4157 immediately offer the correct label menu - otherwise it will prompt you | |
4158 for a label type. If you set this variable to @code{nil}, @b{Ref@TeX{}} | |
4159 will always prompt for a label type.@refill | |
4160 @end defopt | |
4161 | |
4162 @deffn {Normal Hook} reftex-display-copied-context-hook | |
4163 Normal Hook which is run before context is displayed anywhere. Designed | |
4164 for @w{@code{X-Symbol}}, but may have other uses as well.@refill | |
4165 @end deffn | |
4166 | |
4167 @deffn Hook reftex-pre-refontification-functions | |
4168 @code{X-Symbol} specific hook. Probably not useful for other purposes. | |
4169 The functions get two arguments, the buffer from where the command | |
4170 started and a symbol indicating in what context the hook is | |
4171 called.@refill | |
4172 @end deffn | |
4173 | |
4174 @deffn {Normal Hook} reftex-select-label-mode-hook | |
4175 Normal hook which is run when a selection buffer enters | |
4176 @code{reftex-select-label-mode}.@refill | |
4177 @end deffn | |
4178 | |
4179 @deffn Keymap reftex-select-label-map | |
4180 The keymap which is active in the labels selection process | |
4181 (@pxref{Referencing Labels}).@refill | |
4182 @end deffn | |
4183 | |
4184 @node Options (Creating Citations), Options (Index Support), Options (Referencing Labels), Options | |
4185 @section Creating Citations | |
4186 @cindex Options, creating citations | |
4187 @cindex Creating citations, options | |
4188 | |
46684
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
4189 @defopt reftex-bibliography-commands |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
4190 LaTeX commands which specify the BibTeX databases to use with the document. |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
4191 @end defopt |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
4192 |
25829 | 4193 @defopt reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps |
4194 List of regular expressions to exclude files in | |
4195 @code{\\bibliography@{..@}}. File names matched by any of these regexps | |
4196 will not be parsed. Intended for files which contain only | |
4197 @code{@@string} macro definitions and the like, which are ignored by | |
4198 @b{Ref@TeX{}} anyway.@refill | |
4199 @end defopt | |
4200 | |
4201 @defopt reftex-default-bibliography | |
4202 List of BibTeX database files which should be used if none are specified. | |
4203 When @code{reftex-citation} is called from a document with neither | |
4204 a @samp{\bibliography@{...@}} statement nor a @code{thebibliography} | |
4205 environment, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will scan these files instead. Intended for | |
4206 using @code{reftex-citation} in non-LaTeX files. The files will be | |
4207 searched along the BIBINPUTS or TEXBIB path.@refill | |
4208 @end defopt | |
4209 | |
4210 @defopt reftex-sort-bibtex-matches | |
4211 Sorting of the entries found in BibTeX databases by reftex-citation. | |
4212 Possible values:@refill | |
4213 @example | |
4214 nil @r{Do not sort entries.} | |
4215 author @r{Sort entries by author name.} | |
4216 year @r{Sort entries by increasing year.} | |
4217 reverse-year @r{Sort entries by decreasing year.} | |
4218 @end example | |
4219 @end defopt | |
4220 | |
4221 @defopt reftex-cite-format | |
4222 The format of citations to be inserted into the buffer. It can be a | |
4223 string, an alist or a symbol. In the simplest case this is just the string | |
4224 @samp{\cite@{%l@}}, which is also the default. See the definition of | |
4225 @code{reftex-cite-format-builtin} for more complex examples.@refill | |
4226 | |
4227 If @code{reftex-cite-format} is a string, it will be used as the format. | |
4228 In the format, the following percent escapes will be expanded.@refill | |
4229 | |
4230 @table @code | |
4231 @item %l | |
4232 The BibTeX label of the citation. | |
4233 @item %a | |
4234 List of author names, see also @code{reftex-cite-punctuation}. | |
4235 @item %2a | |
4236 Like %a, but abbreviate more than 2 authors like Jones et al. | |
4237 @item %A | |
4238 First author name only. | |
4239 @item %e | |
4240 Works like @samp{%a}, but on list of editor names. (@samp{%2e} and | |
4241 @samp{%E} work a well).@refill | |
4242 @end table | |
4243 | |
4244 It is also possible to access all other BibTeX database fields: | |
4245 | |
4246 @example | |
4247 %b booktitle %c chapter %d edition %h howpublished | |
4248 %i institution %j journal %k key %m month | |
4249 %n number %o organization %p pages %P first page | |
4250 %r address %s school %u publisher %t title | |
4251 %v volume %y year | |
4252 %B booktitle, abbreviated %T title, abbreviated | |
4253 @end example | |
4254 | |
4255 @noindent | |
4256 Usually, only @samp{%l} is needed. The other stuff is mainly for the | |
4257 echo area display, and for @code{(setq reftex-comment-citations t)}.@refill | |
4258 | |
4259 @samp{%<} as a special operator kills punctuation and space around it | |
4260 after the string has been formatted.@refill | |
4261 | |
4262 Beware that all this only works with BibTeX database files. When | |
4263 citations are made from the @code{\bibitems} in an explicit | |
4264 @code{thebibliography} environment, only @samp{%l} is available.@refill | |
4265 | |
4266 If @code{reftex-cite-format} is an alist of characters and strings, the | |
4267 user will be prompted for a character to select one of the possible | |
4268 format strings.@refill | |
4269 | |
4270 In order to configure this variable, you can either set | |
4271 @code{reftex-cite-format} directly yourself or set it to the | |
4272 @emph{symbol} of one of the predefined styles. The predefined symbols | |
4273 are those which have an association in the constant | |
4274 @code{reftex-cite-format-builtin}) E.g.: @code{(setq reftex-cite-format | |
4275 'natbib)}.@refill | |
4276 @end defopt | |
4277 | |
4278 @deffn Hook reftex-format-cite-function | |
4279 | |
4280 If non-@code{nil}, should be a function which produces the string to | |
4281 insert as a citation. Note that the citation format can also be changed | |
4282 with the variable @code{reftex-cite-format}. The function will be | |
4283 called with two arguments, the @var{citation-key} and the | |
4284 @var{default-format} (taken from @code{reftex-cite-format}). It should | |
4285 return the string to insert into the buffer.@refill | |
4286 @end deffn | |
4287 | |
4288 @defopt reftex-comment-citations | |
4289 Non-@code{nil} means add a comment for each citation describing the full | |
4290 entry. The comment is formatted according to | |
4291 @code{reftex-cite-comment-format}.@refill | |
4292 @end defopt | |
4293 | |
4294 @defopt reftex-cite-comment-format | |
4295 Citation format used for commented citations. Must @emph{not} contain | |
4296 @samp{%l}. See the variable @code{reftex-cite-format} for possible | |
4297 percent escapes.@refill | |
4298 @end defopt | |
4299 | |
4300 @defopt reftex-cite-punctuation | |
4301 Punctuation for formatting of name lists in citations. This is a list | |
4302 of 3 strings.@refill | |
4303 @enumerate | |
4304 @item | |
4305 normal names separator, like @samp{, } in Jones, Brown and Miller | |
4306 @item | |
4307 final names separator, like @samp{ and } in Jones, Brown and Miller | |
4308 @item | |
4309 The @samp{et al.} string, like @samp{ @{\it et al.@}} in | |
4310 Jones @{\it et al.@} | |
4311 @end enumerate | |
4312 @end defopt | |
4313 | |
4314 @deffn {Normal Hook} reftex-select-bib-mode-hook | |
4315 Normal hook which is run when a selection buffer enters | |
4316 @code{reftex-select-bib-mode}.@refill | |
4317 @end deffn | |
4318 | |
4319 @deffn Keymap reftex-select-bib-map | |
4320 The keymap which is active in the citation-key selection process | |
4321 (@pxref{Creating Citations}).@refill | |
4322 @end deffn | |
4323 | |
4324 @node Options (Index Support), Options (Viewing Cross-References), Options (Creating Citations), Options | |
4325 @section Index Support | |
4326 @cindex Options, Index support | |
4327 @cindex Index support, options | |
4328 | |
4329 @defopt reftex-support-index | |
4330 Non-@code{nil} means, index entries are parsed as well. Index support | |
4331 is resource intensive and the internal structure holding the parsed | |
4332 information can become quite big. Therefore it can be turned off. When | |
4333 this is @code{nil} and you execute a command which requires index | |
4334 support, you will be asked for confirmation to turn it on and rescan the | |
4335 document.@refill | |
4336 @end defopt | |
4337 | |
4338 @defopt reftex-index-special-chars | |
4339 List of special characters in index entries, given as strings. These | |
4340 correspond to the @code{MakeIndex} keywords | |
4341 @code{(@var{level} @var{encap} @var{actual} @var{quote} @var{escape})}. | |
4342 @end defopt | |
4343 | |
4344 @defopt reftex-index-macros | |
4345 List of macros which define index entries. The structure of each entry | |
4346 is | |
4347 @lisp | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4348 (@var{macro} @var{index-tag} @var{key} @var{prefix} @var{exclude} @var{repeat}) |
25829 | 4349 @end lisp |
4350 | |
4351 @var{macro} is the macro. Arguments should be denoted by empty braces, | |
4352 as for example in @samp{\index[]@{*@}}. Use square brackets to denote | |
4353 optional arguments. The star marks where the index key is.@refill | |
4354 | |
4355 @var{index-tag} is a short name of the index. @samp{idx} and @samp{glo} | |
4356 are reserved for the default index and the glossary. Other indices can | |
4357 be defined as well. If this is an integer, the Nth argument of the | |
4358 macro holds the index tag.@refill | |
4359 | |
4360 @var{key} is a character which is used to identify the macro for input | |
4361 with @code{reftex-index}. @samp{?i}, @samp{?I}, and @samp{?g} are | |
4362 reserved for default index and glossary.@refill | |
4363 | |
4364 @var{prefix} can be a prefix which is added to the @var{key} part of the | |
4365 index entry. If you have a macro | |
4366 @code{\newcommand@{\molec@}[1]@{#1\index@{Molecules!#1@}}, this prefix | |
4367 should be @samp{Molecules!}.@refill | |
4368 | |
4369 @var{exclude} can be a function. If this function exists and returns a | |
4370 non-nil value, the index entry at point is ignored. This was | |
4371 implemented to support the (deprecated) @samp{^} and @samp{_} shortcuts | |
4372 in the LaTeX2e @code{index} package.@refill | |
4373 | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4374 @var{repeat}, if non-@code{nil}, means the index macro does not typeset |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4375 the entry in the text, so that the text has to be repeated outside the |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4376 index macro. Needed for @code{reftex-index-selection-or-word} and for |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4377 indexing from the phrase buffer.@refill |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4378 |
25829 | 4379 The final entry may also be a symbol. It must have an association in |
4380 the variable @code{reftex-index-macros-builtin} to specify the main | |
4381 indexing package you are using. Legal values are currently@refill | |
4382 @example | |
4383 default @r{The LaTeX default - unnecessary to specify this one} | |
4384 multind @r{The multind.sty package} | |
4385 index @r{The index.sty package} | |
4386 index-shortcut @r{The index.sty packages with the ^ and _ shortcuts.} | |
4387 @r{Should not be used - only for old documents} | |
4388 @end example | |
4389 Note that AUCTeX sets these things internally for @b{Ref@TeX{}} as well, | |
4390 so with a sufficiently new version of AUCTeX, you should not set the | |
4391 package here. | |
4392 @end defopt | |
4393 | |
4394 @defopt reftex-index-default-macro | |
4395 The default index macro for @code{reftex-index-selection-or-word}. | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4396 This is a list with @code{(@var{macro-key} @var{default-tag})}. |
25829 | 4397 |
4398 @var{macro-key} is a character identifying an index macro - see | |
4399 @code{reftex-index-macros}. | |
4400 | |
4401 @var{default-tag} is the tag to be used if the macro requires a | |
4402 @var{tag} argument. When this is @code{nil} and a @var{tag} is needed, | |
4403 @b{Ref@TeX{}} will ask for it. When this is the empty string and the | |
4404 TAG argument of the index macro is optional, the TAG argument will be | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4405 omitted.@refill |
25829 | 4406 @end defopt |
4407 | |
4408 @defopt reftex-index-default-tag | |
4409 Default index tag. When working with multiple indexes, RefTeX queries | |
4410 for an index tag when creating index entries or displaying a specific | |
4411 index. This variable controls the default offered for these queries. | |
4412 The default can be selected with @key{RET} during selection or | |
4413 completion. Legal values of this variable are:@refill | |
4414 @example | |
4415 nil @r{Do not provide a default index} | |
4416 "tag" @r{The default index tag given as a string, e.g. "idx"} | |
4417 last @r{The last used index tag will be offered as default} | |
4418 @end example | |
4419 @end defopt | |
4420 | |
4421 @defopt reftex-index-math-format | |
4422 Format of index entries when copied from inside math mode. When | |
4423 @code{reftex-index-selection-or-word} is executed inside TeX math mode, | |
4424 the index key copied from the buffer is processed with this format | |
4425 string through the @code{format} function. This can be used to add the | |
4426 math delimiters (e.g. @samp{$}) to the string. Requires the | |
4427 @file{texmathp.el} library which is part of AUCTeX.@refill | |
4428 @end defopt | |
4429 | |
27195 | 4430 @defopt reftex-index-phrase-file-extension |
4431 File extension for the index phrase file. This extension will be added | |
4432 to the base name of the master file. | |
4433 @end defopt | |
4434 | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4435 @defopt reftex-index-phrases-logical-and-regexp |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4436 Regexp matching the @samp{and} operator for index arguments in phrases |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4437 file. When several index arguments in a phrase line are separated by |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4438 this operator, each part will generate an index macro. So each match of |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4439 the search phrase will produce @emph{several} different index entries. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4440 Make sure this does no match things which are not separators. This |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4441 logical @samp{and} has higher priority than the logical @samp{or} |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4442 specified in @code{reftex-index-phrases-logical-or-regexp}.@refill |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4443 @end defopt |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4444 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4445 @defopt reftex-index-phrases-logical-or-regexp |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4446 Regexp matching the @samp{or} operator for index arguments in phrases |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4447 file. When several index arguments in a phrase line are separated by |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4448 this operator, the user will be asked to select one of them at each |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4449 match of the search phrase. The first index arg will be the default. A |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4450 number key @kbd{1}--@kbd{9} must be pressed to switch to another. Make |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4451 sure this does no match things which are not separators. The logical |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4452 @samp{and} specified in @code{reftex-index-phrases-logical-or-regexp} |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4453 has higher priority than this logical @samp{or}.@refill |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4454 @end defopt |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4455 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4456 @defopt reftex-index-phrases-search-whole-words |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4457 Non-@code{nil} means phrases search will look for whole words, not subwords. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4458 This works by requiring word boundaries at the beginning and end of |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4459 the search string. When the search phrase already has a non-word-char |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4460 at one of these points, no word boundary is required there. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4461 @end defopt |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4462 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4463 @defopt reftex-index-phrases-case-fold-search |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4464 Non-@code{nil} means, searching for index phrases will ignore |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4465 case.@refill |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4466 @end defopt |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4467 |
46684
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
4468 @defopt reftex-index-verify-function |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
4469 A function which is called at each match during global indexing. |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
4470 If the function returns nil, the current match is skipped. |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
4471 @end defopt |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
4472 |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4473 @defopt reftex-index-phrases-skip-indexed-matches |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4474 Non-@code{nil} means, skip matches which appear to be indexed already. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4475 When doing global indexing from the phrases buffer, searches for some |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4476 phrases may match at places where that phrase was already indexed. In |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4477 particular when indexing an already processed document again, this |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4478 will even be the norm. When this variable is non-@code{nil}, |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4479 @b{Ref@TeX{}} checks if the match is an index macro argument, or if an |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4480 index macro is directly before or after the phrase. If that is the |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4481 case, that match will be ignored.@refill |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4482 @end defopt |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4483 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4484 @defopt reftex-index-phrases-wrap-long-lines |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4485 Non-@code{nil} means, when indexing from the phrases buffer, wrap lines. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4486 Inserting indexing commands in a line makes the line longer - often |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4487 so long that it does not fit onto the screen. When this variable is |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4488 non-@code{nil}, newlines will be added as necessary before and/or after the |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4489 indexing command to keep lines short. However, the matched text |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4490 phrase and its index command will always end up on a single line.@refill |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4491 @end defopt |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4492 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4493 @defopt reftex-index-phrases-sort-prefers-entry |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4494 Non-@code{nil} means when sorting phrase lines, the explicit index entry |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4495 is used. Phrase lines in the phrases buffer contain a search phrase, and |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4496 sorting is normally based on these. Some phrase lines also have |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4497 an explicit index argument specified. When this variable is |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4498 non-@code{nil}, the index argument will be used for sorting.@refill |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4499 @end defopt |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4500 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4501 @defopt reftex-index-phrases-sort-in-blocks |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4502 Non-@code{nil} means, empty and comment lines separate phrase buffer |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4503 into blocks. Sorting will then preserve blocks, so that lines are |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4504 re-arranged only within blocks. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4505 @end defopt |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4506 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4507 @defopt reftex-index-phrases-map |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4508 Keymap for the Index Phrases buffer. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4509 @end defopt |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4510 |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4511 @defopt reftex-index-phrases-mode-hook |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4512 Normal hook which is run when a buffer is put into |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4513 @code{reftex-index-phrases-mode}.@refill |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4514 @end defopt |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4515 |
25829 | 4516 @defopt reftex-index-section-letters |
4517 The letters which denote sections in the index. Usually these are all | |
4518 capital letters. Don't use any downcase letters. Order is not | |
4519 significant, the index will be sorted by whatever the sort function | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4520 thinks is correct. In addition to these letters, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4521 create a group @samp{!} which contains all entries sorted below the |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4522 lowest specified letter. In the @file{*Index*} buffer, pressing any of |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4523 these capital letters or @kbd{!} will jump to that section.@refill |
25829 | 4524 @end defopt |
4525 | |
4526 @defopt reftex-index-include-context | |
4527 Non-@code{nil} means, display the index definition context in the | |
4528 @file{*Index*} buffer. This flag may also be toggled from the | |
4529 @file{*Index*} buffer with the @kbd{c} key. | |
4530 @end defopt | |
4531 | |
4532 @defopt reftex-index-follow-mode | |
4533 Non-@code{nil} means, point in @file{*Index*} buffer will cause other | |
4534 window to follow. The other window will show the corresponding part of | |
4535 the document. This flag can be toggled from within the @file{*Index*} | |
4536 buffer with the @kbd{f} key. | |
4537 @end defopt | |
4538 | |
4539 @deffn Keymap reftex-index-map | |
4540 The keymap which is active in the @file{*Index*} buffer | |
4541 (@pxref{Index Support}).@refill | |
4542 @end deffn | |
4543 | |
4544 @node Options (Viewing Cross-References), Options (Finding Files), Options (Index Support), Options | |
4545 @section Viewing Cross-References | |
4546 @cindex Options, viewing cross-references | |
4547 @cindex Viewing cross-references, options | |
4548 | |
4549 @defopt reftex-view-crossref-extra | |
4550 Macros which can be used for the display of cross references. | |
4551 This is used when `reftex-view-crossref' is called with point in an | |
4552 argument of a macro. Note that crossref viewing for citations, | |
4553 references (both ways) and index entries is hard-coded. This variable | |
4554 is only to configure additional structures for which crossreference | |
4555 viewing can be useful. Each entry has the structure | |
4556 @example | |
4557 (@var{macro-re} @var{search-re} @var{highlight}). | |
4558 @end example | |
4559 @var{macro-re} is matched against the macro. @var{search-re} is the | |
4560 regexp used to search for cross references. @samp{%s} in this regexp is | |
46684
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
4561 replaced with the macro argument at point. @var{highlight} is an |
25829 | 4562 integer indicating which subgroup of the match should be highlighted. |
4563 @end defopt | |
4564 | |
4565 @defopt reftex-auto-view-crossref | |
4566 Non-@code{nil} means, initially turn automatic viewing of crossref info | |
4567 on. Automatic viewing of crossref info normally uses the echo area. | |
47050
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
4568 Whenever point is idle for more than @code{reftex-idle-time} seconds on |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
4569 the argument of a @code{\ref} or @code{\cite} macro, and no other |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
4570 message is being displayed, the echo area will display information about |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
4571 that cross reference. You can also set the variable to the symbol |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
4572 @code{window}. In this case a small temporary window is used for the |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
4573 display. This feature can be turned on and off from the menu |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
4574 (Ref->Options).@refill |
25829 | 4575 @end defopt |
4576 | |
4577 @defopt reftex-idle-time | |
47050
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
4578 Time (secs) Emacs has to be idle before automatic crossref display |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
4579 or toc recentering is done.@refill |
25829 | 4580 @end defopt |
4581 | |
4582 @defopt reftex-cite-view-format | |
4583 Citation format used to display citation info in the message area. See | |
4584 the variable @code{reftex-cite-format} for possible percent | |
4585 escapes.@refill | |
4586 @end defopt | |
4587 | |
4588 @defopt reftex-revisit-to-echo | |
4589 Non-@code{nil} means, automatic citation display will revisit files if | |
4590 necessary. When nil, citation display in echo area will only be active | |
4591 for cached echo strings (see @code{reftex-cache-cite-echo}), or for | |
4592 BibTeX database files which are already visited by a live associated | |
4593 buffers.@refill | |
4594 @end defopt | |
4595 | |
4596 @defopt reftex-cache-cite-echo | |
4597 Non-@code{nil} means, the information displayed in the echo area for | |
4598 cite macros (see variable @code{reftex-auto-view-crossref}) is cached and | |
4599 saved along with the parsing information. The cache survives document | |
4600 scans. In order to clear it, use @kbd{M-x reftex-reset-mode}. | |
4601 @end defopt | |
4602 | |
4603 @node Options (Finding Files), Options (Optimizations), Options (Viewing Cross-References), Options | |
4604 @section Finding Files | |
4605 @cindex Options, Finding Files | |
4606 @cindex Finding files, options | |
4607 | |
4608 @defopt reftex-texpath-environment-variables | |
4609 List of specifications how to retrieve the search path for TeX files. | |
4610 Several entries are possible.@refill | |
4611 @itemize @minus | |
4612 @item | |
4613 If an element is the name of an environment variable, its content is | |
4614 used.@refill | |
4615 @item | |
4616 If an element starts with an exclamation mark, it is used as a command | |
4617 to retrieve the path. A typical command with the kpathsearch library | |
4618 would be @w{@code{"!kpsewhich -show-path=.tex"}}. | |
4619 @item | |
4620 Otherwise the element itself is interpreted as a path. | |
4621 @end itemize | |
4622 Multiple directories can be separated by the system dependent | |
4623 @code{path-separator}. Directories ending in @samp{//} or @samp{!!} will | |
4624 be expanded recursively. See also @code{reftex-use-external-file-finders}. | |
4625 @end defopt | |
4626 | |
4627 @defopt reftex-bibpath-environment-variables | |
4628 List of specifications how to retrieve the search path for BibTeX | |
4629 files. Several entries are possible.@refill | |
4630 @itemize @minus | |
4631 @item | |
4632 If an element is the name of an environment variable, its content is | |
4633 used.@refill | |
4634 @item | |
4635 If an element starts with an exclamation mark, it is used as a command | |
4636 to retrieve the path. A typical command with the kpathsearch library | |
4637 would be @w{@code{"!kpsewhich -show-path=.bib"}}. | |
4638 @item | |
4639 Otherwise the element itself is interpreted as a path. | |
4640 @end itemize | |
4641 Multiple directories can be separated by the system dependent | |
4642 @code{path-separator}. Directories ending in @samp{//} or @samp{!!} will | |
4643 be expanded recursively. See also @code{reftex-use-external-file-finders}. | |
4644 @end defopt | |
4645 | |
4646 @defopt reftex-file-extensions | |
4647 Association list with file extensions for different file types. | |
4648 This is a list of items, each item is like: | |
4649 @code{(@var{type} . (@var{def-ext} @var{other-ext} ...))} | |
4650 @example | |
4651 @var{type}: @r{File type like @code{"bib"} or @code{"tex"}.} | |
4652 @var{def-ext}: @r{The default extension for that file type, like @code{".tex"} or @code{".bib"}.} | |
4653 @var{other-ext}: @r{Any number of other legal extensions for this file type.} | |
4654 @end example | |
4655 When a files is searched and it does not have any of the legal extensions, | |
4656 we try the default extension first, and then the naked file name.@refill | |
4657 @end defopt | |
4658 | |
4659 @defopt reftex-search-unrecursed-path-first | |
4660 Non-@code{nil} means, search all specified directories before trying | |
4661 recursion. Thus, in a path @samp{.//:/tex/}, search first @samp{./}, | |
4662 then @samp{/tex/}, and then all subdirectories of @samp{./}. If this | |
4663 option is @code{nil}, the subdirectories of @samp{./} are searched | |
4664 before @samp{/tex/}. This is mainly for speed - most of the time the | |
4665 recursive path is for the system files and not for the user files. Set | |
4666 this to @code{nil} if the default makes @b{Ref@TeX{}} finding files with | |
4667 equal names in wrong sequence.@refill | |
4668 @end defopt | |
4669 | |
4670 @defopt reftex-use-external-file-finders | |
4671 Non-@code{nil} means, use external programs to find files. Normally, | |
4672 @b{Ref@TeX{}} searches the paths given in the environment variables | |
4673 @code{TEXINPUTS} and @code{BIBINPUTS} to find TeX files and BibTeX | |
4674 database files. With this option turned on, it calls an external | |
4675 program specified in the option @code{reftex-external-file-finders} | |
4676 instead. As a side effect, the variables | |
4677 @code{reftex-texpath-environment-variables} and | |
4678 @code{reftex-bibpath-environment-variables} will be ignored. | |
4679 @end defopt | |
4680 | |
4681 @defopt reftex-external-file-finders | |
4682 Association list with external programs to call for finding files. Each | |
4683 entry is a cons cell @w{@code{(@var{type} . @var{program})}}. | |
4684 @var{type} is either @code{"tex"} or @code{"bib"}. @var{program} is a | |
4685 string containing the external program to use with any arguments. | |
4686 @code{%f} will be replaced by the name of the file to be found. Note | |
4687 that these commands will be executed directly, not via a shell. Only | |
4688 relevant when @code{reftex-use-external-file-finders} is | |
4689 non-@code{nil}.@refill | |
4690 @end defopt | |
4691 | |
4692 @page | |
4693 @node Options (Optimizations), Options (Fontification), Options (Finding Files), Options | |
4694 @section Optimizations | |
4695 @cindex Options, optimizations | |
4696 @cindex Optimizations, options | |
4697 | |
4698 @defopt reftex-keep-temporary-buffers | |
4699 Non-@code{nil} means, keep buffers created for parsing and lookup. | |
4700 @b{Ref@TeX{}} sometimes needs to visit files related to the current | |
4701 document. We distinguish files visited for@refill | |
4702 @table @asis | |
4703 @item PARSING | |
4704 Parts of a multifile document loaded when (re)-parsing the | |
4705 document.@refill | |
4706 @item LOOKUP | |
4707 BibTeX database files and TeX files loaded to find a reference, to | |
4708 display label context, etc.@refill | |
4709 @end table | |
4710 The created buffers can be kept for later use, or be thrown away | |
4711 immediately after use, depending on the value of this variable:@refill | |
4712 | |
4713 @table @code | |
4714 @item nil | |
4715 Throw away as much as possible. | |
4716 @item t | |
4717 Keep everything. | |
4718 @item 1 | |
4719 Throw away buffers created for parsing, but keep the ones created for | |
4720 lookup.@refill | |
4721 @end table | |
4722 | |
4723 If a buffer is to be kept, the file is visited normally (which is | |
4724 potentially slow but will happen only once). If a buffer is to be thrown | |
4725 away, the initialization of the buffer depends upon the variable | |
4726 @code{reftex-initialize-temporary-buffers}.@refill | |
4727 @end defopt | |
4728 | |
4729 @defopt reftex-initialize-temporary-buffers | |
4730 Non-@code{nil} means do initializations even when visiting file | |
4731 temporarily. When @code{nil}, @b{Ref@TeX{}} may turn off find-file hooks and | |
4732 other stuff to briefly visit a file. When @code{t}, the full default | |
4733 initializations are done (@code{find-file-hook} etc.). Instead of | |
4734 @code{t} or @code{nil}, this variable may also be a list of hook | |
4735 functions to do a minimal initialization.@refill | |
4736 @end defopt | |
4737 | |
4738 @defopt reftex-no-include-regexps | |
4739 List of regular expressions to exclude certain input files from parsing. | |
4740 If the name of a file included via @code{\include} or @code{\input} is | |
4741 matched by any of the regular expressions in this list, that file is not | |
4742 parsed by @b{Ref@TeX{}}. | |
4743 @end defopt | |
4744 | |
4745 @defopt reftex-enable-partial-scans | |
4746 Non-@code{nil} means, re-parse only 1 file when asked to re-parse. | |
4747 Re-parsing is normally requested with a @kbd{C-u} prefix to many @b{Ref@TeX{}} | |
4748 commands, or with the @kbd{r} key in menus. When this option is | |
4749 @code{t} in a multifile document, we will only parse the current buffer, | |
4750 or the file associated with the label or section heading near point in a | |
4751 menu. Requesting re-parsing of an entire multifile document then | |
4752 requires a @kbd{C-u C-u} prefix or the capital @kbd{R} key in | |
4753 menus.@refill | |
4754 @end defopt | |
4755 | |
4756 @defopt reftex-save-parse-info | |
4757 Non-@code{nil} means, save information gathered with parsing in files. | |
4758 The file @file{MASTER.rel} in the same directory as @file{MASTER.tex} is | |
4759 used to save the information. When this variable is @code{t}, | |
4760 @itemize @minus | |
4761 @item | |
4762 accessing the parsing information for the first time in an editing | |
4763 session will read that file (if available) instead of parsing the | |
4764 document.@refill | |
4765 @item | |
4766 exiting Emacs or killing a buffer in reftex-mode will cause a new | |
4767 version of the file to be written.@refill | |
4768 @end itemize | |
4769 @end defopt | |
4770 | |
27195 | 4771 @defopt reftex-parse-file-extension |
4772 File extension for the file in which parser information is stored. | |
4773 This extension is added to the base name of the master file. | |
4774 @end defopt | |
4775 | |
25829 | 4776 @defopt reftex-allow-automatic-rescan |
4777 Non-@code{nil} means, @b{Ref@TeX{}} may rescan the document when this seems | |
4778 necessary. Applies (currently) only in rare cases, when a new label | |
4779 cannot be placed with certainty into the internal label list. | |
4780 @end defopt | |
4781 | |
4782 @defopt reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers | |
4783 Non-@code{nil} means use a separate selection buffer for each label | |
4784 type. These buffers are kept from one selection to the next and need | |
4785 not to be created for each use - so the menu generally comes up faster. | |
4786 The selection buffers will be erased (and therefore updated) | |
4787 automatically when new labels in its category are added. See the | |
4788 variable @code{reftex-auto-update-selection-buffers}.@refill | |
4789 @end defopt | |
4790 | |
4791 @defopt reftex-auto-update-selection-buffers | |
4792 Non-@code{nil} means, selection buffers will be updated automatically. | |
4793 When a new label is defined with @code{reftex-label}, all selection | |
4794 buffers associated with that label category are emptied, in order to | |
4795 force an update upon next use. When @code{nil}, the buffers are left | |
4796 alone and have to be updated by hand, with the @kbd{g} key from the | |
4797 label selection process. The value of this variable will only have any | |
4798 effect when @code{reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers} is | |
4799 non-@code{nil}.@refill | |
4800 @end defopt | |
4801 | |
4802 @node Options (Fontification), Options (Misc), Options (Optimizations), Options | |
4803 @section Fontification | |
4804 @cindex Options, fontification | |
4805 @cindex Fontification, options | |
4806 | |
4807 @defopt reftex-use-fonts | |
4808 Non-@code{nil} means, use fonts in label menu and on-the-fly help. | |
4809 Font-lock must be loaded as well to actually get fontified | |
4810 display. After changing this option, a rescan may be necessary to | |
4811 activate it.@refill | |
4812 @end defopt | |
4813 | |
4814 @defopt reftex-refontify-context | |
4815 Non-@code{nil} means, re-fontify the context in the label menu with | |
4816 font-lock. This slightly slows down the creation of the label menu. It | |
4817 is only necessary when you definitely want the context fontified.@refill | |
4818 | |
4819 This option may have 3 different values: | |
4820 @table @code | |
4821 @item nil | |
4822 Never refontify. | |
4823 @item t | |
4824 Always refontify. | |
4825 @item 1 | |
4826 Refontify when necessary, e.g. with old versions of the x-symbol | |
4827 package.@refill | |
4828 @end table | |
4829 The option is ignored when @code{reftex-use-fonts} is @code{nil}.@refill | |
4830 @end defopt | |
4831 | |
4832 @defopt reftex-highlight-selection | |
4833 Non-@code{nil} means, highlight selected text in selection and | |
4834 @file{*toc*} buffers. Normally, the text near the cursor is the | |
4835 @emph{selected} text, and it is highlighted. This is the entry most | |
4836 keys in the selection and @file{*toc*} buffers act on. However, if you | |
4837 mainly use the mouse to select an item, you may find it nice to have | |
4838 mouse-triggered highlighting @emph{instead} or @emph{as well}. The | |
4839 variable may have one of these values:@refill | |
4840 | |
4841 @example | |
4842 nil @r{No highlighting.} | |
4843 cursor @r{Highlighting is cursor driven.} | |
4844 mouse @r{Highlighting is mouse driven.} | |
4845 both @r{Both cursor and mouse trigger highlighting.} | |
4846 @end example | |
4847 | |
4848 Changing this variable requires to rebuild the selection and *toc* | |
4849 buffers to become effective (keys @kbd{g} or @kbd{r}).@refill | |
4850 @end defopt | |
4851 | |
4852 @defopt reftex-cursor-selected-face | |
4853 Face name to highlight cursor selected item in toc and selection buffers. | |
4854 See also the variable @code{reftex-highlight-selection}.@refill | |
4855 @end defopt | |
4856 @defopt reftex-mouse-selected-face | |
4857 Face name to highlight mouse selected item in toc and selection buffers. | |
4858 See also the variable @code{reftex-highlight-selection}.@refill | |
4859 @end defopt | |
4860 @defopt reftex-file-boundary-face | |
4861 Face name for file boundaries in selection buffer. | |
4862 @end defopt | |
4863 @defopt reftex-label-face | |
4864 Face name for labels in selection buffer. | |
4865 @end defopt | |
4866 @defopt reftex-section-heading-face | |
4867 Face name for section headings in toc and selection buffers. | |
4868 @end defopt | |
4869 @defopt reftex-toc-header-face | |
4870 Face name for the header of a toc buffer. | |
4871 @end defopt | |
4872 @defopt reftex-bib-author-face | |
4873 Face name for author names in bib selection buffer. | |
4874 @end defopt | |
4875 @defopt reftex-bib-year-face | |
4876 Face name for year in bib selection buffer. | |
4877 @end defopt | |
4878 @defopt reftex-bib-title-face | |
4879 Face name for article title in bib selection buffer. | |
4880 @end defopt | |
4881 @defopt reftex-bib-extra-face | |
4882 Face name for bibliographic information in bib selection buffer. | |
4883 @end defopt | |
4884 @defopt reftex-select-mark-face | |
4885 Face name for marked entries in the selection buffers. | |
4886 @end defopt | |
4887 @defopt reftex-index-header-face | |
4888 Face name for the header of an index buffer. | |
4889 @end defopt | |
4890 @defopt reftex-index-section-face | |
4891 Face name for the start of a new letter section in the index. | |
4892 @end defopt | |
4893 @defopt reftex-index-tag-face | |
4894 Face name for index names (for multiple indices). | |
4895 @end defopt | |
4896 @defopt reftex-index-face | |
4897 Face name for index entries. | |
4898 @end defopt | |
4899 | |
4900 @node Options (Misc), , Options (Fontification), Options | |
4901 @section Miscellaneous | |
4902 @cindex Options, misc | |
4903 | |
4904 @defopt reftex-extra-bindings | |
4905 Non-@code{nil} means, make additional key bindings on startup. These | |
4906 extra bindings are located in the users @samp{C-c letter} | |
39267 | 4907 map. @xref{Key Bindings}.@refill |
25829 | 4908 @end defopt |
4909 | |
4910 @defopt reftex-plug-into-AUCTeX | |
4911 Plug-in flags for AUCTeX interface. This variable is a list of | |
4912 5 boolean flags. When a flag is non-@code{nil}, @b{Ref@TeX{}} | |
4913 will@refill | |
4914 | |
4915 @example | |
4916 - supply labels in new sections and environments (flag 1) | |
4917 - supply arguments for macros like @code{\label} (flag 2) | |
4918 - supply arguments for macros like @code{\ref} (flag 3) | |
4919 - supply arguments for macros like @code{\cite} (flag 4) | |
4920 - supply arguments for macros like @code{\index} (flag 5) | |
4921 @end example | |
4922 | |
4923 You may also set the variable itself to t or nil in order to turn all | |
4924 options on or off, respectively.@* | |
4925 Supplying labels in new sections and environments applies when creating | |
4926 sections with @kbd{C-c C-s} and environments with @kbd{C-c C-e}.@* | |
4927 Supplying macro arguments applies when you insert such a macro | |
4928 interactively with @kbd{C-c @key{RET}}.@* | |
4929 See the AUCTeX documentation for more information. | |
4930 @end defopt | |
4931 | |
4932 @defopt reftex-revisit-to-follow | |
4933 Non-@code{nil} means, follow-mode will revisit files if necessary. | |
4934 When nil, follow-mode will be suspended for stuff in unvisited files. | |
4935 @end defopt | |
4936 | |
4937 @defopt reftex-allow-detached-macro-args | |
4938 Non-@code{nil} means, allow arguments of macros to be detached by | |
4939 whitespace. When this is @code{t}, the @samp{aaa} in @w{@samp{\bbb | |
4940 [xxx] @{aaa@}}} will be considered an argument of @code{\bb}. Note that | |
4941 this will be the case even if @code{\bb} is defined with zero or one | |
4942 argument.@refill | |
4943 @end defopt | |
4944 | |
4945 @node Keymaps and Hooks, Changes, Options, Top | |
4946 @section Keymaps and Hooks | |
4947 @cindex Keymaps | |
4948 | |
4949 @b{Ref@TeX{}} has the usual general keymap and load-- and mode-hook. | |
4950 | |
4951 @deffn Keymap reftex-mode-map | |
4952 The keymap for @b{Ref@TeX{}} mode. | |
4953 @end deffn | |
4954 | |
4955 @deffn {Normal Hook} reftex-load-hook | |
4956 Normal hook which is being run when loading @file{reftex.el}. | |
4957 @end deffn | |
4958 | |
4959 @deffn {Normal Hook} reftex-mode-hook | |
4960 Normal hook which is being run when turning on @b{Ref@TeX{}} mode.@refill | |
4961 @end deffn | |
4962 | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4963 Furthermore, the 4 modes used for referencing labels, creating |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4964 citations, the table of contents buffer and the phrases buffer have |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4965 their own keymaps and mode hooks. See the respective sections. There |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4966 are many more hooks which are described in the relevant sections about |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4967 options for a specific part of @b{Ref@TeX{}}.@refill |
25829 | 4968 |
4969 @node Changes, , Keymaps and Hooks, Top | |
4970 @chapter Changes | |
4971 @cindex Changes | |
4972 | |
4973 Here is a list of recent changes to @b{Ref@TeX{}}. | |
4974 | |
4975 @ignore | |
4976 @noindent @b{Version 1.00} | |
4977 @itemize @bullet | |
4978 @item | |
4979 released on 7 Jan 1997. | |
4980 @end itemize | |
4981 | |
4982 @noindent @b{Version 1.04} | |
4983 @itemize @bullet | |
4984 @item | |
4985 Macros as wrappers, AMSTeX support, delayed context parsing for | |
4986 new labels.@refill | |
4987 @end itemize | |
4988 | |
4989 @noindent @b{Version 1.05} | |
4990 @itemize @bullet | |
4991 @item | |
4992 XEmacs port. | |
4993 @end itemize | |
4994 | |
4995 @noindent @b{Version 1.07} | |
4996 @itemize @bullet | |
4997 @item | |
4998 @b{Ref@TeX{}} gets its own menu. | |
4999 @end itemize | |
5000 | |
5001 @noindent @b{Version 1.09} | |
5002 @itemize @bullet | |
5003 @item | |
5004 Support for @code{tex-main-file}, an analogue for | |
5005 @code{TeX-master}.@refill | |
5006 @item | |
5007 MS-DOS support. | |
5008 @end itemize | |
5009 | |
5010 @noindent @b{Version 2.00} | |
5011 @itemize @bullet | |
5012 @item | |
5013 Labels can be derived from context (default for sections). | |
5014 @item | |
5015 Configuration of label insertion and label referencing revised. | |
5016 @item | |
5017 Crossref fields in BibTeX database entries. | |
5018 @item | |
5019 @code{reftex-toc} introduced (thanks to Stephen Eglen). | |
5020 @end itemize | |
5021 | |
5022 @noindent @b{Version 2.03} | |
5023 @itemize @bullet | |
5024 @item | |
5025 @code{figure*}, @code{table*}, @code{sidewaysfigure/table} added to | |
5026 default environments.@refill | |
5027 @item | |
5028 @code{reftex-bibfile-ignore-list} introduced (thanks to Rory Molinari). | |
5029 @item | |
5030 New functions @code{reftex-arg-label}, @code{reftex-arg-ref}, | |
5031 @code{reftex-arg-cite}.@refill | |
5032 @item | |
5033 Emacs/XEmacs compatibility reworked. XEmacs 19.15 now is | |
5034 required.@refill | |
5035 @item | |
5036 @code{reftex-add-to-label-alist} (to be called from AUCTeX style | |
5037 files).@refill | |
5038 @item | |
5039 Finding context with a hook function. | |
5040 @item | |
5041 Sorting BibTeX entries (new variable: | |
5042 @code{reftex-sort-bibtex-matches}). | |
5043 @end itemize | |
5044 | |
5045 @noindent @b{Version 2.05} | |
5046 @itemize @bullet | |
5047 @item | |
5048 Support for @file{custom.el}. | |
5049 @item | |
5050 New function @code{reftex-grep-document} (thanks to Stephen Eglen). | |
5051 @end itemize | |
5052 | |
5053 @noindent @b{Version 2.07} | |
5054 @itemize @bullet | |
5055 @item | |
5056 New functions @code{reftex-search-document}, | |
5057 @code{reftex-query-replace-document}. | |
5058 @end itemize | |
5059 | |
5060 @noindent @b{Version 2.11} | |
5061 @itemize @bullet | |
5062 @item | |
5063 Submitted for inclusion to Emacs and XEmacs. | |
5064 @end itemize | |
5065 | |
5066 @noindent @b{Version 2.14} | |
5067 @itemize @bullet | |
5068 @item | |
5069 Variable @code{reftex-plug-into-AUCTeX} simplifies cooperation with | |
5070 AUCTeX.@refill | |
5071 @end itemize | |
5072 | |
5073 @noindent @b{Version 2.17} | |
5074 @itemize @bullet | |
5075 @item | |
5076 Label prefix expands % escapes with current file name and other stuff. | |
5077 @item | |
5078 Citation format now with % escapes. This is not backward | |
5079 compatible!@refill | |
5080 @item | |
5081 TEXINPUTS variable recognized when looking for input files. | |
5082 @item | |
5083 Context can be the nth argument of a macro.@refill | |
5084 @item | |
5085 Searching in the select buffer is now possible (@kbd{C-s} and | |
5086 @kbd{C-r}).@refill | |
5087 @item | |
5088 Display and derive-label can use two different context methods. | |
5089 @item | |
5090 AMSmath @code{xalignat} and @code{xxalignat} added. | |
5091 @end itemize | |
5092 | |
5093 @noindent @b{Version 3.00} | |
5094 @itemize @bullet | |
5095 @item | |
5096 @b{Ref@TeX{}} should work better for very large projects: | |
5097 @item | |
5098 The new parser works without creating a master buffer. | |
5099 @item | |
5100 Rescanning can be limited to a part of a multifile document. | |
5101 @item | |
5102 Information from the parser can be stored in a file. | |
5103 @item | |
5104 @b{Ref@TeX{}} can deal with macros having a naked label as an argument. | |
5105 @item | |
5106 Macros may have white space and newlines between arguments. | |
5107 @item | |
5108 Multiple identical section headings no longer confuse | |
5109 @code{reftex-toc}.@refill | |
5110 @item | |
5111 @b{Ref@TeX{}} should work correctly in combination with buffer-altering | |
5112 packages like outline, folding, x-symbol, iso-cvt, isotex, etc.@refill | |
5113 @item | |
5114 All labeled environments discussed in @emph{The LaTeX Companion} by | |
5115 Goossens, Mittelbach & Samarin, Addison-Wesley 1994) are part of | |
5116 @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s defaults.@refill | |
5117 @end itemize | |
5118 | |
5119 @noindent @b{Version 3.03} | |
5120 @itemize @bullet | |
5121 @item | |
5122 Support for the LaTeX package @code{xr}, for inter-document | |
5123 references.@refill | |
5124 @item | |
5125 A few (minor) Mule-related changes. | |
5126 @item | |
5127 Fixed bug which could cause @emph{huge} @file{.rel} files. | |
5128 @item | |
5129 Search for input and @file{.bib} files with recursive path definitions. | |
5130 @end itemize | |
5131 | |
5132 @noindent @b{Version 3.04} | |
5133 @itemize @bullet | |
5134 @item | |
5135 Fixed BUG in the @emph{xr} support. | |
5136 @end itemize | |
5137 | |
5138 @noindent @b{Version 3.05} | |
5139 @itemize @bullet | |
5140 @item | |
5141 Compatibility code now first checks for XEmacs feature. | |
5142 @end itemize | |
5143 | |
5144 @noindent @b{Version 3.07} | |
5145 @itemize @bullet | |
5146 @item | |
5147 @code{Ref} menu improved. | |
5148 @end itemize | |
5149 | |
5150 @noindent @b{Version 3.10} | |
5151 @itemize @bullet | |
5152 @item | |
5153 Fixed a bug which made reftex 3.07 fail on [X]Emacs version 19. | |
5154 @item | |
5155 Removed unimportant code which caused OS/2 Emacs to crash. | |
5156 @item | |
5157 All customization variables now accessible from menu. | |
5158 @end itemize | |
5159 | |
5160 @noindent @b{Version 3.11} | |
5161 @itemize @bullet | |
5162 @item | |
5163 Fixed bug which led to naked label in (e.g.) footnotes. | |
5164 @item | |
5165 Added scroll-other-window functions to RefTeX-Select. | |
5166 @end itemize | |
5167 | |
5168 @noindent @b{Version 3.12} | |
5169 @itemize @bullet | |
5170 @item | |
5171 There are 3 new keymaps for customization: @code{reftex-toc-map}, | |
5172 @code{reftex-select-label-map}, @code{reftex-select-bib-map}. | |
5173 @item | |
5174 Refontification uses more standard font-lock stuff. | |
5175 @item | |
5176 When no BibTeX database files are specified, citations can also use | |
5177 @code{\bibitem} entries from a @code{thebibliography} environment.@refill | |
5178 @end itemize | |
5179 | |
5180 @noindent @b{Version 3.14} | |
5181 @itemize @bullet | |
5182 @item | |
5183 Selection buffers can be kept between selections: this is faster. | |
5184 See new variable @code{reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers}.@refill | |
5185 @item | |
5186 Prefix interpretation of reftex-view-crossref changed. | |
5187 @item | |
5188 Support for the @code{varioref} package (@kbd{v} key in selection | |
5189 buffer).@refill | |
5190 @end itemize | |
5191 | |
5192 @noindent @b{Version 3.16} | |
5193 @itemize @bullet | |
5194 @item | |
5195 New hooks @code{reftex-format-label-function}, | |
5196 @code{reftex-format-ref-function}, @code{reftex-format-cite-function}.@refill | |
5197 @item | |
5198 TeXInfo documentation completed. | |
5199 @item | |
5200 Some restrictions in Label inserting and referencing removed. | |
5201 @item | |
5202 New variable @code{reftex-default-bibliography}. | |
5203 @end itemize | |
5204 | |
5205 @noindent @b{Version 3.17} | |
5206 @itemize @bullet | |
5207 @item | |
5208 Additional bindings in selection and @file{*toc*} buffers. @kbd{g} | |
5209 redefined. | |
5210 @item | |
5211 New command @code{reftex-save-all-document-buffers}. | |
5212 @item | |
5213 Magic word matching made more intelligent. | |
5214 @item | |
5215 Selection process can switch to completion (with @key{TAB}). | |
5216 @item | |
5217 @code{\appendix} is now recognized and influences section numbering. | |
5218 @item | |
5219 File commentary shortened considerably (use Info documentation). | |
5220 @item | |
5221 New option @code{reftex-no-include-regexps} to skip some include files. | |
5222 @item | |
5223 New option @code{reftex-revisit-to-follow}. | |
5224 @end itemize | |
5225 | |
5226 @noindent @b{Version 3.18} | |
5227 @itemize @bullet | |
5228 @item | |
5229 The selection now uses a recursive edit, much like minibuffer input. | |
5230 This removes all restrictions during selection. E.g. you can now | |
5231 switch buffers at will, use the mouse etc.@refill | |
5232 @item | |
5233 New option @code{reftex-highlight-selection}. | |
5234 @item | |
37999
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
5235 @kbd{mouse-2} can be used to select in selection and @file{*toc*} |
25829 | 5236 buffers.@refill |
5237 @item | |
5238 Fixed some problems regarding the interaction with VIPER mode. | |
5239 @item | |
5240 Follow-mode is now only used after point motion. | |
5241 @item | |
5242 @b{Ref@TeX{}} now finally does not fontify temporary files anymore. | |
5243 @end itemize | |
5244 | |
5245 @noindent @b{Version 3.19} | |
5246 @itemize @bullet | |
5247 @item | |
5248 Fixed bug with AUCTeX @code{TeX-master}. | |
5249 @end itemize | |
5250 | |
5251 @noindent @b{Version 3.21} | |
5252 @itemize @bullet | |
5253 @item | |
5254 New options for all faces used by @b{Ref@TeX{}}. They're in the | |
5255 customization group @code{reftex-fontification-configurations}.@refill | |
5256 @end itemize | |
5257 | |
5258 @noindent @b{Version 3.22} | |
5259 @itemize @bullet | |
5260 @item | |
5261 Fixed bug with empty context strings. | |
5262 @item | |
5263 @code{reftex-mouse-view-crossref} is now bound by default at | |
37999
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
5264 @kbd{S-mouse-2}.@refill |
25829 | 5265 @end itemize |
5266 | |
5267 @noindent @b{Version 3.23} | |
5268 @itemize @bullet | |
5269 @item | |
5270 Parse files @file{MASTER.rel} made compatible between Emacs and XEmacs. | |
5271 @item | |
5272 @code{kill-emacs-hook} and @code{kill-buffer-hook} now write the parse | |
5273 file. | |
5274 @item | |
5275 The cursor inside a @code{\ref} or @code{\cite} macro can now trigger | |
5276 automatic display of crossref information in the echo area. See | |
5277 variable @code{reftex-auto-view-crossref}. | |
5278 @item | |
5279 AUCTeX interface updates: | |
5280 @itemize @minus | |
5281 @item | |
5282 AUCTeX 9.9c and later notifies @b{Ref@TeX{}} about new sections. | |
5283 @item | |
5284 @b{Ref@TeX{}} notifies AUCTeX about new labels. | |
5285 @item | |
5286 @code{TeX-arg-ref} no longer used (introduction was unnecessary). | |
5287 @item | |
5288 @code{reftex-arg-label} and @code{reftex-arg-cite} fixed up. | |
5289 @item | |
5290 Settings added to @b{Ref@TeX{}} via style files remain local. | |
5291 @end itemize | |
5292 @item | |
5293 Fixed bug with @code{reftex-citation} in non-latex buffers. | |
5294 @item | |
5295 Fixed bug with syntax table and context refontification. | |
5296 @item | |
5297 Safety-net for name change of @code{font-lock-reference-face}. | |
5298 @end itemize | |
5299 | |
5300 @noindent @b{Version 3.24} | |
5301 @itemize @bullet | |
5302 @item | |
5303 New option @code{reftex-revisit-to-echo}. | |
5304 @item | |
5305 Interface with X-Symbol (>=2.6) is now complete and stable. | |
5306 @item | |
5307 Adapted to new outline, which uses overlays. | |
5308 @item | |
5309 File names in @code{\bibliography} may now have the @code{.bib} | |
5310 extension.@refill | |
5311 @item | |
5312 Fixed Bug with parsing "single file" from master file buffer. | |
5313 @end itemize | |
5314 | |
5315 @noindent @b{Version 3.25} | |
5316 @itemize @bullet | |
5317 @item | |
5318 Echoing of citation info caches the info for displayed entries. | |
5319 New option @code{reftex-cache-cite-echo}.@refill | |
5320 @item | |
5321 @kbd{M-x reftex-reset-mode} now also removes the file with parsing | |
5322 info.@refill | |
5323 @item | |
5324 Default of @code{reftex-revisit-to-follow} changed to nil. | |
5325 @end itemize | |
5326 | |
5327 @noindent @b{Version 3.26} | |
5328 @itemize @bullet | |
5329 @item | |
5330 [X]Emacs 19 no longer supported. Use 3.22 for Emacs 19. | |
5331 @item | |
5332 New hooks @code{reftex-translate-to-ascii-function}, | |
5333 @code{reftex-string-to-label-function}.@refill | |
5334 @item | |
5335 Made sure automatic crossref display will not visit/scan files. | |
5336 @end itemize | |
5337 | |
5338 @noindent @b{Version 3.27} | |
5339 @itemize @bullet | |
5340 @item | |
5341 Macros can define @emph{neutral} labels, just like @code{\label} | |
5342 itself.@refill | |
5343 @item | |
5344 New option @code{reftex-allow-detached-macro-args}, default @code{nil}! | |
5345 @end itemize | |
5346 | |
5347 @noindent @b{Version 3.28} | |
5348 @itemize @bullet | |
5349 @item | |
5350 Auto view crossref for XEmacs uses @code{post-command-hook} to restart the | |
5351 timer, since itimer restart is not reliable.@refill | |
5352 @item | |
5353 Option @code{reftex-bibfile-ignore-list} renamed to @code{-regexps}. | |
5354 @item | |
5355 Expansion of recursive tex and bib path rewritten. | |
5356 @item | |
5357 Fixed problem where @b{Ref@TeX{}} did not scan unsaved buffers. | |
5358 @item | |
5359 Fixed bug with section numbering after *-red sections. | |
5360 @end itemize | |
5361 | |
5362 @noindent @b{Version 3.30} | |
5363 @itemize @bullet | |
5364 @item | |
5365 In @code{reftex-citation}, the regular expression used to scan BibTeX | |
5366 files can be specified using completion on known citation keys. | |
5367 @item | |
5368 New keys @kbd{a} and @kbd{A} in BibTeX selection process to cite @emph{all} | |
5369 entries. | |
5370 @item | |
5371 New command @code{reftex-renumber-simple-labels} to renumber simple | |
5372 labels like @samp{eq:13} sequentially through a document. | |
5373 @end itemize | |
5374 @noindent @b{Version 3.33} | |
5375 @itemize @bullet | |
5376 @item | |
5377 Multiple selection buffers are now hidden buffers (they start with a | |
5378 SPACE). | |
5379 @item | |
5380 Fixed bug with file search when TEXINPUTS environment variable is empty. | |
5381 @end itemize | |
5382 @noindent @b{Version 3.34} | |
5383 @itemize @bullet | |
5384 @item | |
5385 Additional flag in @code{reftex-derive-label-parameters} do make only | |
5386 lowercase labels (default @code{t}). | |
5387 @item | |
5388 All @file{.rel} files have a final newline to avoid queries. | |
5389 @item | |
5390 Single byte representations of accented European letters (ISO-8859-1) | |
5391 are now legal in labels. | |
5392 @end itemize | |
5393 @noindent @b{Version 3.35} | |
5394 @itemize @bullet | |
5395 @item | |
5396 ISO 8859 Latin-1 chars are converted to ASCII to derive better labels. | |
5397 This takes back the related changes in 3.34 for safety reasons.@refill | |
5398 @end itemize | |
5399 @noindent @b{Version 3.36} | |
5400 @itemize @bullet | |
5401 @item | |
5402 New value @code{window} for option @code{reftex-auto-view-crossref}. | |
5403 @end itemize | |
5404 @noindent @b{Version 3.38} | |
5405 @itemize @bullet | |
5406 @item | |
5407 @code{reftex-view-crossref} no longer moves to find a macro. Point has | |
5408 to be on the macro argument. | |
5409 @end itemize | |
5410 @noindent @b{Version 3.41} | |
5411 @itemize @bullet | |
5412 @item | |
5413 New options @code{reftex-texpath-environment-variables}, | |
5414 @code{reftex-use-external-file-finders}, | |
5415 @code{reftex-external-file-finders}, | |
5416 @code{reftex-search-unrecursed-path-first}. | |
5417 @item | |
5418 @emph{kpathsearch} support. See new options and | |
5419 @code{reftex-bibpath-environment-variables}. | |
5420 @end itemize | |
5421 @noindent @b{Version 3.42} | |
5422 @itemize @bullet | |
5423 @item | |
5424 File search further refined. New option @code{reftex-file-extensions}. | |
5425 @item | |
5426 @file{*toc*} buffer can show the file boundaries of a multifile | |
5427 document, all labels and associated context. New keys @kbd{i}, @kbd{l}, | |
5428 and @kbd{c}. New options @code{reftex-toc-include-labels}, | |
5429 @code{reftex-toc-include-context}, | |
5430 @code{reftex-toc-include-file-boundaries}. @refill | |
5431 @end itemize | |
5432 @noindent @b{Version 3.43} | |
5433 @itemize @bullet | |
5434 @item | |
5435 Viewing cross-references generalized. Now works on @code{\label}, | |
5436 @code{\ref}, @code{\cite}, @code{\bibitem}, @code{\index}, variations of | |
5437 these, and from BibTeX buffers.@refill | |
5438 @item | |
5439 New option @code{reftex-view-crossref-extra}.@refill | |
5440 @item | |
5441 Support for the additional sectioning commands @code{\addchap} and | |
5442 @code{\addsec} which are defined in the LaTeX KOMA-Script classes.@refill | |
5443 @item | |
5444 Files in @code{reftex-default-bibliography} will be searched along | |
5445 @code{BIBINPUTS} path.@refill | |
5446 @item | |
5447 Reading a parse file now checks consistency. | |
5448 @end itemize | |
5449 @noindent @b{Version 4.00} | |
5450 @itemize @bullet | |
5451 @item | |
5452 RefTeX has been split into several smaller files which are autoloaded on | |
5453 demand. | |
5454 @item | |
5455 Index support, along with many new options. | |
5456 @item | |
5457 The selection of keys for @code{\ref} and @code{\cite} now allows to | |
5458 select multiple items by marking entries with the @kbd{m} key. | |
5459 @item | |
5460 Fancyref support. | |
5461 @end itemize | |
5462 @noindent @b{Version 4.01} | |
5463 @itemize @bullet | |
5464 @item | |
5465 New command @code{reftex-index-globally} to index a word in many | |
5466 places in the document. Also available from the index buffer with | |
5467 @kbd{&}. | |
5468 @item | |
5469 The first item in a @code{reftex-label-alist} entry may now also be a parser | |
5470 function to do non-standard parsing. | |
5471 @item | |
5472 @code{reftex-auto-view-crossref} no longer interferes with | |
5473 @code{pop-up-frames} (patch from Stefan Monnier). | |
5474 @end itemize | |
5475 @noindent @b{Version 4.02} | |
5476 @itemize @bullet | |
5477 @item | |
5478 macros ending in @samp{refrange} are considered to contain references. | |
5479 @item | |
5480 Index entries made with @code{reftex-index-selection-or-word} in TeX | |
5481 math mode automatically get enclosing @samp{$} to preserve math mode. See | |
5482 new option @code{reftex-index-math-format}. Requires AUCTeX. | |
5483 @end itemize | |
5484 @noindent @b{Version 4.04} | |
5485 @itemize @bullet | |
5486 @item | |
5487 New option @code{reftex-index-default-tag} implements a default for queries. | |
5488 @end itemize | |
5489 @noindent @b{Version 4.06} | |
5490 @itemize @bullet | |
5491 @item | |
5492 @code{reftex-section-levels} can contain a function to compute the level | |
5493 of a sectioning command. | |
5494 @item | |
5495 Multiple @code{thebibliography} environments recognized. | |
5496 @end itemize | |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5497 @noindent @b{Version 4.09} |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5498 @itemize @bullet |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5499 @item |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5500 New option @code{reftex-toc-max-level} to limit the depth of the toc. |
39267 | 5501 New key binding @kbd{t} in the @file{*toc*} buffer to change this |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5502 setting.@refill |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5503 @item |
46918
82d113655734
Minor spelling and grammar corrections.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
46684
diff
changeset
|
5504 RefTeX maintains an @file{Index Phrases} file in which phrases can be |
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5505 collected. When the document is ready, RefTeX can search all |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5506 these phrases and assist indexing all matches.@refill |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5507 @item |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5508 The variables @code{reftex-index-macros} and |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5509 @code{reftex-index-default-macro} have changed their syntax slightly. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5510 The @var{repeat} parameter has move from the latter to the former. |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5511 Also calls to @code{reftex-add-index-macros} from AUCTeX style files |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5512 need to be adapted.@refill |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5513 @item |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5514 The variable @code{reftex-section-levels} no longer contains the |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5515 default stuff which has been moved to a constant.@refill |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5516 @item |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5517 Environments like theorems can be placed into the TOC by putting |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5518 entries for @samp{"begin@{theorem@}"} in |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5519 @code{reftex-setion-levels}.@refill |
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5520 @end itemize |
27195 | 5521 @noindent @b{Version 4.10} |
5522 @itemize @bullet | |
5523 @item | |
5524 Renamed @file{reftex-vcr.el} to @file{reftex-dcr.el} because of conflict | |
5525 with @file{reftex-vars.el} on DOS machines. | |
5526 @item | |
5527 New options @code{reftex-parse-file-extension} and | |
5528 @code{reftex-index-phrase-file-extension}. | |
5529 @end itemize | |
27604 | 5530 @noindent @b{Version 4.11} |
5531 @itemize @bullet | |
5532 @item | |
5533 Fixed bug which would parse @samp{\Section} just like @samp{\section}. | |
5534 @end itemize | |
29772
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
5535 @noindent @b{Version 4.12} |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
5536 @itemize @bullet |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
5537 @item |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
5538 Support for @file{bibentry} citation style. |
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
5539 @end itemize |
34403
6679ef9b33fe
RefTeX 4.15 update
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
30009
diff
changeset
|
5540 @noindent @b{Version 4.15} |
6679ef9b33fe
RefTeX 4.15 update
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
30009
diff
changeset
|
5541 @itemize @bullet |
6679ef9b33fe
RefTeX 4.15 update
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
30009
diff
changeset
|
5542 @item |
46684
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
5543 Fixed bug with parsing of BibTeX files, when fields contain quotes or |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
5544 unmatched parenthesis. |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
5545 @item |
34403
6679ef9b33fe
RefTeX 4.15 update
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
30009
diff
changeset
|
5546 Small bug fixes. |
6679ef9b33fe
RefTeX 4.15 update
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
30009
diff
changeset
|
5547 @item |
6679ef9b33fe
RefTeX 4.15 update
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
30009
diff
changeset
|
5548 Improved interaction with Emacs LaTeX mode. |
6679ef9b33fe
RefTeX 4.15 update
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
30009
diff
changeset
|
5549 @end itemize |
47050
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
5550 @end ignore |
46684
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
5551 @noindent @b{Version 4.17} |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
5552 @itemize @bullet |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
5553 @item |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
5554 The toc window can be split off horizontally. See new options |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
5555 @code{reftex-toc-split-windows-horizontally}, |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
5556 @code{reftex-toc-split-windows-horizontally-fraction}. |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
5557 @item |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
5558 It is possible to specify a function which verifies an index match |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
5559 during global indexing. See new option @code{reftex-index-verify-function}. |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
5560 @item |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
5561 The macros which input a file in LaTeX (like \input, \include) can |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
5562 be configured. See new option @code{reftex-include-file-commands}. |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
5563 @item |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
5564 The macros which specify the bibliography file (like \bibliography) can |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
5565 be configured. See new option @code{reftex-bibliography-commands}. |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
5566 @item |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
5567 The regular expression used to search for the \bibliography macro has |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
5568 been relaxed to allow for @samp{@{\bibliography@{...@}@}} needed by |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
5569 chapterbib. |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
5570 @item |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
5571 Small bug fixes. |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
5572 @end itemize |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
5573 @noindent @b{Version 4.18} |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
5574 @itemize @bullet |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
5575 @item |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
5576 @code{reftex-citation} uses the word before the cursor as a default |
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
5577 search string. |
47050
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
5578 @item |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
5579 Simplified several regular expressions for speed. |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
5580 @item |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
5581 Better support for chapterbib. |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
5582 @end itemize |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
5583 @noindent @b{Version 4.19} |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
5584 @itemize @bullet |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
5585 @item |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
5586 New command `reftex-toc-recenter' (@kbd{C-c -}) which shows the current |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
5587 section in the TOC buffer without selecting the TOC window. |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
5588 @item |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
5589 Recentering happens automatically in idle time when the option |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
5590 @code{reftex-auto-recenter-toc} is turned on. |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
5591 @item |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
5592 Fixed several bugs related to automatic cursor positioning in the TOC |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
5593 buffer. |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
5594 @item |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
5595 The highlight in the TOC buffer stays when the focus moves to a |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
5596 different window. |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
5597 @item |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
5598 New command `reftex-goto-label'. |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
5599 @item |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
5600 Part numbers are no longer included in chapter numbers, and a new |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
5601 part does not reset the chapter counter. See new option |
904fd28be439
Update to RefTeX 4.19
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46918
diff
changeset
|
5602 @code{reftex-part-resets-chapter}. |
46684
9569bac241a3
Update to RefTeX 4.18
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
46272
diff
changeset
|
5603 @end itemize |
25829 | 5604 |
5605 @node Index, , , Top | |
5606 @unnumbered Index | |
5607 @printindex cp | |
5608 | |
5609 @summarycontents | |
5610 @contents | |
5611 @bye | |
5612 |